Home
MX8 Reference Guide - Southern Graphics & Systems
Contents
1. eeeeeeeeeee 175 Gloss y iors teeecta eters nei eoo mui E 39 Good scan Bad scan see 146 GrabTime utility eene 124 H Handle Installation itecto eec HERR 13 Handling Batteries 62 Handstrap 43 iecore edes 8 Handstrap Install eene 14 Hardware Configuration ooooonoccconoconcconcnonocononnnonononnconncnnnonnos 43 Heli pre RH ERR 39 HHP 5380SF 2D imager sse 47 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE 80 81 Hotkey Apphock A 218 Hotswapping allowed for Main Battery esses 61 hotswapping not allowed flash cards oc orina 50 Chu 45 A EENE E NERE EEN 47 HyperTerminal ACUVeS YING 32 tise 120 I Icons DGSK O py ainia dansa 69 Idle TIG iecit rege a E e boron 95 MXS Reference Guide 264 IBC PSA A A hr it dense 255 Inbox OU OOK coorta Mtn 74 Input panel virtual keyboard sss 36 Input Panel properties 96 Install ActiveSync on Desktop or Laptop 115 Install MX8 LXEbook een 25 Integrated barcode scanner port 47 Internal modems not supported by LXE sss 94 Internal SD flash card and port 50 Internet connectivity essere 97 Internet Explorer eeeeeeee 74 APPLOCK qu PEE 217 Radio card and ISP required
2. 74 Internet popup blocker ee 97 Internet privacy 97 Internet Security sss 97 IO Components eisteien epit etsi teintes enr 43 J Java Option ien d 66 JEM CE iniecit ewm eee es 68 K key repeat delay and rate sss 99 Keyboard Onscreen only ici 96 KEYCOMP compiler eere 257 KEY COMB EXE ettet ecrit tas 236 Keymap 32 key Keymap noia ettet s 231 Keypad and entering data 36 Keypad Shortcuts usc eet erts 21 L LAUNCH EXE i ceeeeeente ek epicena is 121 LEAP without WPA Authentication Summit 184 LED Alpha mode eee 55 Battery Status inicia 60 Li Ion battery life 15 List of configured ActiveSync connections 106 Logging APPLOCK E 220 Loss of Host Re connection eesess 119 Low Battery Warning sseeeeeeeee 61 LXE Manuals CD eee 39 LXE Security Primer ssssssss 165 194 LXE ServicePass esee 39 LXEbook MXS Users Guide 25 MXS Reference Guide Index M MAG addiess ee etes 80 81 Matti ES 143 Main Battery Pack sss 45 Main tab A CE 168 Mappable Diamond Keys sees 54 NES 253 Match ste nta adidas 153 Match list rules sene 154 Media Player A 75 Memory doe TR 253 alloc
3. M 48 Suspend Resumen eite RH ERR HR TRE LH TECH HR CREE RITE TESI FER TR T IE FH ele UG 48 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Table of Contents 5 Warmi Boot seg ld liada 48 A CETT 48 Reset to Default Semi G8 eta A a EEUU ORI eee Ib pad 49 Saving Changes to the RegistIY ccoo cion cian errada a ie A 49 Miril SD COE iui ccs sates xe Sees was xax sue A uu ERE Cheam ce 50 Mini SD card Insertion Removal reir eerren erain FREUE ERE REPRE REN Pal TE ERE ERR EM sancdnacsanss 50 Power Mods iiic uu cina kac cran cuc coxa ent cnalas kas CENA E kee CU MAR a RC CAREERS cies A A A AR RRA RRA E 51 isto MM EP E MN HE 51 Poo MID MEME UR RI CR UU eM ees 51 KU op E AE A hiss E E tase EAP E I E N eae E as 51 O 52 KU WEG m Q l 52 E NO ud clu UU D iE 52 BIS EN EXE Z Pan M a 52 TOKOM emt 53 Mappable Diamond Keys retten dde De hide cun us dee E E en A 54 EED MGT CG A cp LETT 35 kde uf CHE 35 DVCAM tapices iii 35 Alpha Mode Alph Key unicidad 35 Standard Keys uino ee PR d divitum n dvi dud a ub ee iR I UE UU 56 Function Keys cias 56 Sticky do vote E MmmT 56 Made Key Functions ioi rd RE ed ens und ue d vn dur HR MR NI FUE EU OE EVO 58 CapsLock Mode va iav ie d ade uu iia 58 Iocurtem ceu URRE 58 I 59 Display Backlight TIMET 2 ee ERE iaa REEL Eod ede teh IS 39 Cleaning the Display Sca
4. Data Bits Os B Scanner Control fox x Main comi Barcode vibration Enable Code 1 Symbology Settings Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers Pox x Main Com Barcode Vibration Scanner Control Good Scan Vibration O ot Short Medium O Long Figure 4 1 Scanner Control Panels 145 al is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window When this box is not checked the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using Wedge Disable Enable Internal Scanner Sound when you want an application not the scan engine or the CE operating system to control scanner audible notifications Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Disable Use Illumination LEDs when the integrated imager does not have illumination LEDs E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 146 Main Tab Main Tab Access AY Settings Control Panel Scanner Main tab Factory Default Settings Scanner Control ok x Main Main com Barcode vibration Port 1 Internal Um B dij PARE Port 2 Disabled Ocom Ocom O com Port 3 Disabled feted O internal O neem O Bluetooth O cutout I output Send key messages WEDGE Enable
5. Diamond 1 Diamond 2 Diamond 3 options are the same Figure 3 25 Mappable Keys Assign key sequence settings by selecting keys from the drop down boxes Tap the OK box to save the changes Tap the X box to ignore changes Tap the box for Help The changes take effect immediately MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 101 al Mixer Access A Settings Control Panel Mixer Icon Adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input Factory Default Settings Output Master Volume 6dB Sidetone 12dB Input Input None Input Boost Disabled Record Gain 22 5dB Mixer Settings None Omice Bluetooth M Input Boost Record Gain 1 5 db d db CS Figure 3 26 Mixer Settings Tap and hold the Output sliders move them left and right to adjust the decibel level or tap the left and right arrows to adjust the sliders Input Boost When checked enabled increases the sensitivity of the microphone by 20 dB How To Enable Microphone Enable the Mic radio button and the Input Boost checkbox Disable Microphone Enable the None radio button Tap OK to save the settings or tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 102 Settings Control Panel Options al Mouse Access A Settings Control Panel Mouse Double Click Double click this grid
6. The Spc key adds a space to the line of data on the display This function is similar Space to a regular keyboard s Spacebar Note that the Spc key only stays active for one keystroke Function Keys Sticky Keys The Sticky Key feature allows the user to activate multi key press combinations with one finger Sticky Key Function Ctl Ctrl Control key A Control sticky key press stays active until the Control key is pressed again The Control key enables the control functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Control key Each time you need to use a Control function you need to press the Ctl Ctrl key before pressing the desired key Alt Alternate key An Alt sticky key press stays active until the Alt key is pressed again The Alt key enables the alternate functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Alt key Each time you need to use an alternate function you need to press the Alt key before pressing the desired key Shft Shift key A Shift key press ends a sticky key function The Shft key enables the shifted functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Shift key Note that the Shift key only stays active for one keystroke Each time you need to use a Shifted function you need to press the Shft key before pressing the desired key When the Shft key is pressed the next key is determined by the major key legends i e
7. E EQ MX8RG A 265 Reflash the Mobile Device ssessss 141 Reflash Automatic 142 Reflash Manual esee 141 REGEDIT EXE s eeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen etn 124 Regional settings defaults sssss 108 Registry and save settings 49 Registry content back up location o ooonocnnccnocnnocnonnconnconcnnnconocnnoo 113 REGLOAD EXE eeeeeeeeeeeeen rennen 125 Release Renew button sse 174 Remove a progra cococcccnnccnoncnonnnononononononononononaninnos 108 Reset to Factory Default How to 49 Review System and mobile device data and revision EA A RTS 111 RFTerm sees enne 26 68 Root CA Certificates Generating penne eiae Rl inh 194 Installing on mobile device 196 RS 232 and Power port 46 S Save settings c iei tii te ees 49 Scan Status LED eee 55 Scanner Mainrtab cecinere eme ee 146 lo m P 146 Send Key Messages ssssssseeeee 146 WED GIE 2 euren epe 146 Scanner Aperture identify type sess 7 Scanner Control Characters Tab 157 Scanner engine type 254 Scanner LED functioning eee 38 Scanner factory defaults ssssss 143 Scanning and data entry sese 38 Schemes Tabaco 107 Screwdriver Phillips for ha
8. No ALT modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keycontrol No CTRL modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keydnarrow No down arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keypower No power key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyscanl No Scan Key 1 definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 242 Creating Custom Key Maps No definition for MapHead keyscan2 No Scan Key 2 definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified
9. E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 118 ActiveSync Get Connected Process P Connect Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the MX8 the client Select Connect from 4 Programs Communications Connect Cable Multipurpose USB and Power MX8A051MULTICBLUSB Cable Multipurpose RS 232 and Power MX8A055MULTICBLDA9F Note USB will start automatically when the cable is connected Explore From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC click on the Explore button which allows you to explore the MX8 from the PC side with some limitations You can copy files to or from the MX8 using drag and drop You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the Windows directory on the MX8 Technically the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows OS image This however includes most of the files in the Windows directory For example you can drag the LXEbook MX8 User s Guide from your desktop computer to the My Documents folder on the MX8 Disconnect Serial Connection e Disconnect the cable from the MX8 e Put the MX8 into suspend by tapping the red Power button e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status bar Then click the Disconnect button USB Connection e Disconnect the cable from the MX8 e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status ba
10. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AppLock FileName windows AppLock exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 63 HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist KbdLocks FileName WwindowsWKbdLocks exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 62 HKEY LOCAL MACHINEISSOFTWAREMLXE Persisti Bluetooth FileName System Bluetooth CAB FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Installed dword 0 Order dword 30 When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device s operating system refer to the default image segments that are commented with RFTERM to see the expected Registry format One special key is included to force the system folders Desktop Fonts Programs etc to copy from the internal ATA card System to the Windows directory This is implemented as a persist key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled especially for AppLock The filename is a special internal trigger for the Launch utility to activate the CopyFolders function DO NOT EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION You may however change the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist COPYFOLDERS FileName COP YFOLDERS E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 124 Utilities FileCheck Order dword 0F To have files CAB EXE REG or WAV files loaded on startup when sequence of execution
11. Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 2 Public Prim Class 3 Public i Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root ci ABAT El Occ e der 9 53 uA E Figure 5 31 Certificate Stores Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key jok x O From a Smart Card Reader z Card Absent Figure 5 32 Import Certificate From a File Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 197 al Sele T Fj NM OK X O system sa rfengca cer Name Type certificates v Ls al Figure 5 33 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the Explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK Tap OK to import the certificate Once the certificate is installed return to the proper authentication section described later in this chapter E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 198 Certificates P User Certificates Generating a User Certificate for the MX8 The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA To request the user certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with the username of the user certificate required Connect to 100 100 100 100 x v R Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name a y El Password Remember
12. MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A
13. Orphaned Packages To prevent the enabler from restoring parameters delete orphaned packages through the Avalanche Mobility Center refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details and instruction E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 126 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration al Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Avalanche MC Console Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop Select File Settings Enter the password Select the Startup Shutdown tab Select the Do not monitor or launch Enabler parameter to prevent automatic monitoring upon startup 5 Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface Click the OK button to save the changes 7 Reboot the device if necessary hag ed ell D Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the Mobile Device Server running on the host machine e Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server and the LXE device e Wired via a USB connection using ActiveSync between the Mobile Device Server and the mobile device e Wirelessly via the 2 4GHz network card and an access point After installing the Enabler on the mobile unit a reboot is required for the Enabler to begin normal functionality Following a mobile device reboo
14. Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Admin Login password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility oki x Main Profile status Diags Global sem Default 17 uu New Rename Delete Scan Radio Bit Rate 2 fopen Radio Mode v Encryption EAP Type auto WEP ET WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Figure 5 13 Configure a Summit Profile for LEAP w o WPA Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to Auto WEP To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Username or Domain Username Password Figure 5 14 LEAP Credentials Dialog Enter the Username or Domain Username in the Credentials popup text entry box if desired Enter the Password if desired Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a warm boot to connect using the new profile configuration See Also WPA LEAP Authentication later in this section to configure the client for WPA LEAP E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 185 d See Also Sign on vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter 1f the username and password are left blank dur
15. Tap the View button Installing User Certificates and Private Keys Certificates gt ok El Stores Trusted Authorities y Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 2 Public Prim Class 3 Public n Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root civ Remove Import Figure 1 24 View Certificate Details Set the Field to Private Key Make sure the private key is Present If it is not present install the private key file See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Bluetooth 29 d Bluetooth Access A Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or Bluetooth icon in taskbar or Bluetooth icon on Desktop 8 g Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or the Desktop to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairings or application The MX8 default Bluetooth setting is Enabled The LXE MX8 Bluetooth module is designed to Discover and pair with LXE Bluetooth scanners and LXE Bluetooth printers Prerequisite The Bluetooth devices printers and or scanners have been setup to allow them to be Discovered and Comnected Paired The SysAdmin is familiar with the pairing function of the Bluetooth devices Discover Figure 1 25 Bluetooth Devices Display Before Discovering Devices Initial Use 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar 2 Tap t
16. Volume amp Sounds Pro fa LOK E Volume amp Sounds Pro Ka OK x Volume Sounds Volume Sounds l Event A E o E gt ieee Soft Loud Qt Asterisk Enable sounds for Close Program M Events warnings system events t te stop Y Applications Default Sound SER Empty Recycle Bin O Notifications alarms reminders de Exclamation Key clicks Add soft O Loud Sound Preview Screen taps 8l O sot O Loud Scheme oo y een Delete Figure 1 22 Volume amp Sounds Properties Change the volume setting and tap OK to save the change You can also select deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft the computer will emit a tone each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Software Setup 25 Applying the Protective Film to the Display First clean the display of fingerprints lint particles dust and smudges Remove the protective film from its container Remove any protective backing from the film sheet by lifting the backing from a corner of the film Discard the backing Apply the film to the screen starting at one side and smoothing it across the display If air bubbles appear raise the film slightly and continue smoothing the film across the display until it covers the glass surface of the display If dust lint or smudges are trapped between
17. a 88 Tura cr Blustoot BUON 88 Bro ee 88 Pd jn e 89 Easy Pairing and AUto Repgotiie etit cerent geret ne bet E HEU RI gana EEEE EEUU UE EXE EAEE TEER RENE 90 O 91 COM ooo uno aoioa 92 BE MASc cee per IEHUITMEIEIE PUNTI IIS UNTEN OU 93 Dil E 94 LjJtbc H 93 Bdckeroud uec cepit iere siete eH EPEREEEHEU EUER E HEINE EE EHE TUERI EUER E NER AE ERE EAE FESEEY ETER 95 APPO T TIS TETUR TEE TTE DEO EDT OD LT 95 PACKS MEE POO HH 95 put Panel M 96 emet Opio aei erecti tie ada aaa 97 Soon M t 99 Kcvnmips and E onlsacesdwietende eni MIS E TIF UN uu iaads 99 Mappable Kamui Eres ed aise EE 100 INUIT see O A LEM E CN 101 or c HENRI I IN 102 Network and Dialup Connectie siii 103 Create a Connection OP ues re RP Eve ornament bane ri mee Dude M re d nds 103 ON obest nomm eiectum din ort irn etenim E BN E asa esi mp EDD 104 OR 105 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Table of Contents 7 al Troubleshooting a das 105 PC Conneetrons ON 106 MGW ge ver TE 107 Resipnal Sellngs usted i tie HS tpa eia e n ca 108 REMOVE PrO TOMS edna I Me el tal steel ts ences up I IE MD dE 108 DOAI Seen gr ate M IMEEM ME CE MU eee ere es 109 Sd ru E 110 Double qul
18. e The System GrabTime ini file takes precedence over the Windows GrabTime ini file Each time the mobile device is cold booted the Windows GrabTime ini file is replaced with the default version and the System GrabTime ini file is not RegEditor EXE Before using REGEDITOR EXE please refer to commercially available Microsoft M A Power Tools for Windows manuals For example Microsoft Windows Registry Guide Second edition The Registry Editor allows viewing searching for items and changing settings in the registry Launch REG The registry contains information about how the mobile device runs LXE recommends caution when inspecting and editing the Registry as making incorrect changes can damage the mobile device operating system LXE recommends making a backup copy of the registry before viewing or carefully making changes to the registry RegDump EXE Double tapping the RegDump EXE file causes the contents of the Registry to be copied to an ASCII text file Reg txt in the My Documents folder MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 125 RegLoad EXE Double tapping a registry settings file e g REG causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry This is similar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC The REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Briefly If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manag
19. of pressure or greater The color display is optimized for indoor lighting The display is black when the device is in suspend mode or when both batteries have expired and the unit is Off Display Backlight Timer When the Backlight timer expires the display backlight is dimmed The default value for the battery power timer is 3 seconds The default value for the external power timer is 2 minutes and the checkbox is enabled The backlight timer dims the backlight on the touchscreen at the end of the specified time When the display wakes up the Backlight timer begins the countdown again See the section titled Set the Display Backlight Timer in Chapter 1 Introduction Cleaning the Display Scanner Aperture If there is a static screen protector installed remove the screen protector before cleaning the display panel Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the scan aperture and display If the scanner aperture or display become soiled or smudged clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex R without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol Do not use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the surface Use a clean damp lint free cloth Do not scrub optical surfaces If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint particulates can be removed with clean filtered canned air Static screen protectors for the MX8 are available from LXE E EQ MX8RG A M
20. 1 ARE 0 dB o oed RUM UM UE M DE EE 135 Shotteuts Tbe S ar HERE ETERNA Seer bett bs DR UR LA Eos ER Qa ue UR Uu ER DNE De LM CE RA aeu ee ELE dud 136 o Tabu oou UEM I RUM E E MUR UR LED A E DOE C CMM 137 BS CAUSE A E E onsen es 139 Trouble sipo CLI asset cess cierran ub etx UD En cM I amie causes UMS LU 140 A 140 Clearing Registre SoN S cairia a 140 Reltash the Mobile DVICE m 141 Preparatiof ina it te 141 PrIacedUbe cido ici ica 141 Command Line Inteco ricino ral as eaten tas 142 CHAPTER 4 SCANNER 143 Di VER La Fi a 310 y OA DC O 143 Barcode Processing Over View o eranccndusndasevs sesducrsersecerdzeoscoiasdeen 144 Factory Default AAA A wsganesdevsqanevedelondessacen 145 III AAA q o ETE 146 A a e aS PISEERTERRESSEFERRERAE REREEQSF NREBBARRIRESS mann cane sive ER KRERIE PAIS EARN ESSEN RE ENE RE ERSURERR 147 ce o ee 148 nung e E E 148 Enable Code Deco potasa ea eee 149 Barcode Symbology Settlnps escasa aia 150 Strip Leading Trailing Control sein 152 Barcode Data Match aora aa rota 153 barcode Data Match Edit BUttOHS anio ramo ELDER EE GE DES 153 Macano aaa 154 Add Pret Sul Ott Ol see cee st hie se eee sess he eset ew eee EEEE eaten 155 Barcode Cm Char Mappite ocres 156 Translate Alla isa 157 Barcode Custom Ie mite acatar 158 Control Code Replacement EXamples ninia 159 Barcode PIOCOSSIHES Explota 160 Leisti Based Barcode tp pin tata
21. COL1ROW3 KY_ BLUE COLIROWA4 VK RETURN COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open COL2ROWO VK F4 COL2ROW1 VK F5 COL2ROW2 KY PROG1 COL2ROW3 VK UP COL2ROWA4 VK SHIFT COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open MXS Reference Guide 244 Creating Custom Key Maps LLELVEOLLELEL TLL ELA ECVE COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open COLAROWO 1 COL4ROW1 4 COL4ROW2 7 COL4ROW3 VK_MENU COL4ROW4 KY_PROG2 COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_CONTROL CELTAS LOE LULL LEE VILE EEL OL COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open CA GE EGEOECE FCEOGECFOEGE WE EE EL X Wa P COL6ROWO0 2 2 COL6ROW1 5 COL6ROW22 8 COL6ROW3 2 0 COL6ROW4 KY_PROG3 COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 ACTION KY ALPHA Foro rp arr rm pop LM EEL ELE EL EOL COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open COL8ROWO 3 COL8ROW1 6 COL8ROW2 9 COL8ROW3 VK SPACI COL8ROW4 KY ORANGE COL8ROW5 open COL8ROW6 open COL8ROW7 VK DELETE KG UICE EG UIT EX WEE IAEA AAA COL9ROWO open COL9ROW1 open COL9ROW2 open COL9ROW3 open EA MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps E EQ MX8RG A CO CO CO CO L9ROW4 open L9ROW5 open L9ROW6 open L9R
22. Contact LXE Support for assistance E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 36 Entering Data Entering Data You can enter data into the MX8 through several different methods The Scanner aperture provides barcode data entry the I O port is used to input output data and the keypad provides manual entry Mobile devices with a touch screen use a stylus to input data the I O port and or the keypad An input panel virtual keyboard is available in applications that expect keyed input Using the Keypad The keypad is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise Almost any function that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the MX8 keypads but it may take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task Please refer to Appendix A Key Maps for instruction on the specific key presses to access all keypad functions Almost every key has two or three different functions The primary alpha or numeric character is printed on the key The Orange or Blue keys are pressed when you want to use a sticky key function For example when you press a Blue or Orange key the sticky key then press the key that has the desired second function key the second function key is the active key The specific sticky character is printed above the corresponding key in either Orange or Blue Using the Input Panel or Virtual Keyboard The virtual keyboard is always available when needed e g text field input T
23. Daylight Savings sese 93 DEFAULT KEY eese 237 Ip dq EE 69 Device Name and description ssss 112 E EQ MX8RG A Index Diagnosti6S oia an 174 Diags tab SUM isc 174 Dialing properties oooccoonccnncncccononononcnncnnnononnnonannninno 94 Diamond keys sse 54 Digital certificates 91 Dimensions esee eene 254 Disable Summit Client sese 73 Discover and Query sse 85 Display eea UL 253 IN 135 A uen ter S 59 A dante ui 59 Specifications 254 Display Backlight Timer eee 59 display owner notes sse 22 Display properties esse 95 Display Timer seen 59 Double click sensitivity for stylus taps 102 E EAP FAST Authentication Summit 185 Edit Diamond key parameters sess 54 Enable Code ID eee 149 Enable Code ID drop down box 148 Enable Internal Scanner sound 146 Enable or Disable specific symbology 148 Enabler communication eese enne 128 Network adapter status link speed 140 Enabler Configuration eee 128 Enabler installation sss 125 Enabler passwords eeeeeee 129 Enabler Un
24. Enter notes Enable disable Owner display parameters Enter Network ID for the device user name password domain Password Set MX8 access password properties for sign on and or screen saver MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 79 Option Function PC Connection Control the connection between the MX8 and a local desktop or laptop computer Power Set Power scheme properties Review device status and properties Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on country region and language settings Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety Note Programs listed in this location are deleted upon warm and cold boot processes Scanner Set scanner key wedge internal scanner port enable disable internal scanner sounds enable disable illumination LEDs and set vibration options Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for COMI port See also Chapter 5 Scanner Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel System Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Enter device name and description Review copyright notices Terminal Server Client Licenses Select a server client license from a drop down list Not available for LXE support at this release Volume and Sounds Enable disable
25. MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Components 7 al Scanner Imager Aperture CAUTION Never stare directly into the beam aperture Read Laser Warnings and Labels in the MX User s Guide before using the scanner imager E Figure 1 3 Scanner Aperture Identify the type of integrated imager or laser scanner installed in the MX8 by looking at the type of plastic lens covering the Beam aperture The No Scanner option has an opaque lens protecting the MX8 internal components The SE955 laser barcode scanner has a red lens protecting the laser engine The EV 15 integrated imager has a clear lens protecting the imager engine The 5380SF 2D imager has an opaque lens protecting the imager engine Trigger Handle Figure 1 4 Trigger Handle Optional 1 Scan Aperture 3 Handle 2 Trigger 4 Tether Attach Point Note Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX8 or the handstrap is attached not both LXE recommends that in the absence of a trigger handle the handstrap be used at all times The stylus is tethered to the handstrap or the trigger handle Refer to the Trigger Handle installation instruction later in this chapter E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide Components al Handstrap Figure 1 5 Handstrap Optional 1 Handstrap Retainer Bracket 2 Handstrap 3 Handstrap Clip Note Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX8 or the handstrap is attached not both LXE recommends that in the absenc
26. No definition for MapHead keyscan3 No Trigger Button definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyshift No SHIFT modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyuparrow No up arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No equal in value line A value line must be of the form value data A value line was expected but there was no equal in it or A comment line did not begin with a semicolon No MAPNAME defined There is no map name defined The keyboard driver requires this name to be able to load the keymap tables This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified Scan code algorithm required A COLxROWX data value was found before any ALGOR statement ALGOR algorithm is parsed to decide how to encode COLxROWX into a keymap value Too many maps for specified MAPCNT There are more MAP sections defined that the MAPCNT field specified Unknown scan code algorithm The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEY
27. Root Certificates 4 ono eit het adea idv a dig de Vd uiui ie dde uu 194 Download Root CA Certificate ini 194 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device oie hetero oett ose deed 196 User Certiticates cao in m T LIN EVE GM ee iE HO ste d ren t d v ndo 198 Generating a User Certificate for the MX ete I IRE RU de EUR CERERI aa UNE 198 Installing a User Certificate on the MX8 WPA TLS Only iecit ttt er edere etae tees ied 203 CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK 207 IntrodUellOli uin sisse kDa REESE REA RE PEDEAR E RRARR EG FUGARRR E 207 Setup NOW Dovid enn 208 Administration Mode socias comarca crasas anda nana iaaiiai aAa AAE EAA ERR AAE oa iA Akanbi 210 Ann o n O eA eA i aaa E M ET 210 do ge PA o o nmm 211 AppLock Password Troubles olli nac A aca 211 End User Switching TEAM AA 212 Use by lus TAD dad Ei 212 Use tbe switch Kev S equenes oaa eee rtm diim ta tr usate taa 212 Multi Application ConfigUkallgh cun ern roter otav xp E eK RARA RARA 213 Applicaton Patel isos atan A pr Ud Rua m deu ens 213 Launch BUOR s a ie sermo diem Duet mtem a 215 UAE BOO ia 215 Auto Re Laune cistitis 216 Manual Launch sesion a aii 216 Allow Cl s icd a eH HE CR REV cH ee me 217 End User Intemet Explorer BUIE 3 rn ae t e hU cia 217 Security Panel A ee ee ee 218 Setting an Activation Hotkey abs 218 Setting a Password in the Security Parla o 218 Status Panelen eerte e ERE E a ev ut dum 219 b rS 219 O eue 220 SUMI EE 220 Troubleshooting
28. Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Report failure to reconnect Enabled The default time delay is 30 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is re connected A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Possible reasons for failure to reconnect Timeout expired without reconnecting attempted to pair with a device that is currently paired with another device attempted to pair with a known device that moved out of range or was turned off attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why reconnect failed is unknown Computer is connectable Enabled Disable this option to inhibit MX8 connection with all Bluetooth devices Computer is discoverable Disabled Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the MXS MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 89 Option Default Information Prompt if devices Disabled When enabled a dialog box is placed on the display Tap request to pair the X button OK button or No button to close the dialog box When enabled the Bluetooth connection never stops searching for a device it has paired with if the connection is broken such as the paired device entering Suspend mode going out of range or being turned off
29. To Get This MX8 Key Function Zz o o o o 5 o w 2 N X x sS c i4 o x o v O 0 period C n S aa S il v asterisk colon semicolon MXS Reference Guide 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad d Press These Keys and Then Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha x Press This Key 66 666 7 77 777 7777 8 88 888 9 99 999 9999 OoO jd cj oj ojo n2 o nmi i U o9 o wmS9 m m 8 Diamond 2 4 5 1 Spc Del 8 or Diamond 1 0 0 E EQ MX8RG A 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad 235 al To Get This MX8 Key Press These Keys and Then Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha ew 1 TOTO TOTO IL L x Lo 8 ew x tunderscos x emm x 6 de Px LL Ods T 1 Lo x 0 T Alt Px pop Ll Alph X Diamond 3 or x 1 x 2 or x 5 x 3 or x 4 x 9 or X 4 pop ee ee 5 x 6 or x Ctrl 8 lo pop xp 7 x Diamond 2 or x 9 x Diamond 3 or X 0 zero E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 236 Creating Custom Key Maps al Creating Custom Key Maps Prerequisite LXE MX8 SDK CD MX8A505CES0SDK Introduction A command line compiler called KEYCOMP EXE is provided on the MX8 SDK CD Using this compiler the System Administrator can convert a sample default key map text file into a custom key map text file which when loaded onto the mobile d
30. s The VK code parsed is not recognized See the VK Code Table below for valid values Map ended without MAP value The MAP section must contain a MAP value so the data fields can be parsed MAPNAME must be all numerics Because of limitations in Microsoft Layout Manager the map name must be all numeric 4 5 or 6 digits The name parsed did not fit this limitation No definition for map MAP 2ND There is no 2nd keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for map MAP 2NDSHIFT There is no 2nd SHIFT keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for map MAP NORMAL There is no Normal keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for map MAP SHIFT There is no SHIFT keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead key2nd No 2ND modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyalt
31. the Admin Login and active config profile selection Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile The Status tab contains information on the current connection The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the client network device Global parameters are found on the Global tab The values for these parameters apply to all profiles Note A password is required before making changes to Summit client profile parameters A password is not required to switch from one profile to another Help is available by clicking the button in the title bar on most SCU screens SCU Help may also be accessed by selecting Start Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link The SCU does not have to be open to view the help information using this option MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 167 al Summit Tray Icon The Summit tray icon dil provides access to the SCU and is a visual indicator of link status The Summit tray icon is displayed when e The Summit radio is installed and active e The Windows Zero Config utility is not active e The Tray Icon setting is On Tap the icon to launch the Summit Configuration Utility Use the tray icon to view the link status WS Summit client is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point
32. the alpha keys display lower case letters when CAPS is On alpha characters are capitalized For example when CAPS is On and the Shft key and the G key are pressed a lower case g is displayed MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A The Keypad 57 Sticky Key Function Orange and Blue Keys The Orange and Blue keys are sticky keys that when tapped activate the second functions of the keypad Printed above many keys are small characters in either orange on the left side of the key or blue on the right side of the key that represent the second function of that key Using the sticky key activates the second key function Note that the blue and orange sticky keys only stay active for one keystroke Each time you need to activate a second function you must press the Orange or Blue key To cancel a sticky key function before pressing another key press the same sticky key again Orange Key Tap the Orange key to enter orange mode Tap it again to cancel orange mode If you were in blue mode before you pressed the Orange key blue mode is cancelled and you enter Orange mode Blue Key Tap the Blue key to enter blue mode Tap it again to cancel blue mode If you were in orange mode before you pressed the Blue key orange mode is cancelled and you enter Blue mode E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 58 The Keypad Mode Key Functions CapsLo
33. window This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it LOG EX Initializing keyboard hook procedure AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization LOG PROCESSING E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 226 Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Keyboard hook initialization failure The keyboard filter initialization failed LOG_ERROR Keyboard hook loaded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully LOG_EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Loading keyboard hook When AppLock first loads it loads a dll that contains the keyboard hook processing This message is logged prior to the load attempt LOG_PROCESSING Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_ERROR file open has failed This could occur if the file is write protected If the file does not exist it is created Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist the LOG_ERROR switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_EX file has been opened successfully Out of memory for encrypted pwd Not enough memory to encrypt the password LOG_ERROR pRealTaskbarWndProc already set The taskbar control has already been installed LOG_EX Pwd cancelled or invalid rem
34. 00 00 Flagl2 hex A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Appendix B Technical Specifications Physical Specifications Intel Xscale operating at 5220 MHz 32 bit CPU with on chip cache Memory RAM 128 MB SDRAM 20 MB available for programs and data 128 MB Strata Flash Display LCD Transmissive Color optimized for Transmissive LCD with touchscreen indoor use Customer Configurable Display LED Backlighting Mass Removable 128MB Mini SD Card Storage Mini SD card Weights Unit with radio battery SE955 1 Ibs 458g scanner and handle Unit with radio battery SE955 0 84 lbs 385g scanner and handstrap External 20 pin Multi function port 20 Position multi function IO Connector Connectors Interface Provides cabled connection to external devices such as an audio headset USB power connection RS 232 power connection Width at handgrip Scanner No Scanner Integrated Intermec EV 15 Linear Imager SE955 HHP 2 D imager 5300 Symbol SE955 Short Range Batteries Main Li Ion battery pack In Unit Chargeable or Externally 3 7V 3000mAh Chargeable Backup Internal Nickel Metal Hydride Ni Automatically charges from main battery CMOS MH during normal operation Requires AC 2 4V max pow
35. 134 Static screen protector ooooconococonooononnconnonnnonncnnonanonos 59 Status Ayalanche iris 139 Status Panel AppLo ck teer reden 219 Stereo and mono settings for headsets 101 Sticky key cios 56 Stop Bits etc nm Ee D RC REA 143 Stop the Enabler Service 126 Storage Temperature MI 255 US AC to DC sd 255 Stored certificates ida 91 Storing MiniSD Cards sess 50 Strip Leading and Trailing Control 152 Stylus and data entry sese 37 StylUS preste iia 59 Stylus SCA ios 110 Summit EAP FAST Authentication oooooonccicnincnnoncnnnons 185 LEAP without WPA Authentication 184 No SeCUPlLy ion oH RITE ER a 182 PEAP GTC Authentication 190 191 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication 186 O 26 WEP keys 183 WPA LEAP Authentication ssss 188 WPA PSK Authentication esses 189 Summit Client ien cine ttti etie eee 73 Summit Client configuration sss 166 Summit client utility sss 166 MXS Reference Guide Index Summit client utility SCU Did 88 tado eei ese 174 Global tab iii 175 Profile tab oia dt 170 Status tabs 173 Suspend button essere 69 Suspend mode sse 52 Suspend Mode HOW tosse 20 Suspend mode and ActiveSync ss 48 Sw
36. 161 a A m 163 CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION 165 iio Het c enn 165 Summit Client Configuration 1c taces inc rei ii ein 166 Summit Client Utility cce exa ERREUR EIER SR HAS Ia 166 ja jp edo do cone a eco 0 166 S mimit Tray TCO cateii Mm 167 Ma NIC Sa I dE dU trei dasttgetas atts lute te ERE 168 PHP 169 Probe Pdl occ nuenacei lend OMIM UE I DI MUI ML DM E 170 lun EE 170 Pronle Parameters o Lic cup pL ld pL 171 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Table of Contents 9 al SIC UE Ee ET 173 Diass TAD onte t Eden itc fud eene de Usato late eer bre ius te Mesrine 174 O cM E EM DEI IE Hu LI I iM 174 Global TAD E E E E NN A sts 175 Custom Parameter ODD si od as 135 Global Paritaria reo sica 175 Suba Weles ecu aiii 179 Oo A O RAS HR AR ERE CERERI tn 179 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path t rr cinere aaa Ree 181 Jr Recibir CLR nene 181 PA A A D Sepa Sce ea LENS 181 DG CURL encase A E MH E 182 bog EM 183 LEAP w o WPA Authentication sson ii ari 184 EAP FAST Authentication aia eE REEERE RUN ERR a PRA Erie AAR EE ETR ES 185 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication ninia ia aia 186 WPA LEAP Authentication viii diia 188 WPA PSK Authentication iii Do n I ED Hv de v UR DE HE EI aria 189 PEAP GTC Authentication d p RD a ER dvd dtd anne 190 EAP TLS Authentication 191 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client ini aet dd doin ads 193 xj fe 194
37. Access files and programs Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet intranet requires radio card and Internet Service Provider ISP enrollment is not available from LXE Radio Config Used when setting radio power management antenna diversity and Utility roaming profiles LXE recommends using the defaults set by the manufacturer WZC icon in toolbar Summit Client Used for configuring Summit client for radio security settings Bluetooth Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications Start AY Access programs select from the Favorites listing documents last worked on change view settings for the control panel or taskbar on line help run programs or place the unit into Suspend mode E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 70 My Device Folders Desktop P Folder Description idis Gold Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications No Network Mounted network drive No Program Files Applications No System Storage Internal SD Flash Card Yes Storage Card External Storage card Yes Temp Location for temporary files No Windows Operating System in Secure Storage No MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Start Menu Program Options 71 63 Start Menu Progra
38. AppLock i t o ae Lb HER URN UR Eee eee be V deberi oh 220 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 10 Table of Contents al Error MesSages scsi a a A A a A A da 221 AppLock AAA PP RE ECERRRE aSa mI ZE MR aran B M RN En DER 229 APPENDIX A KEY MAPS 231 Introduction usse mixta ti sea EGER KE JA ERR AER ARS RAN CAS AR AAA E RA A ERA 231 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad niter sita teni itta rice ide dae 231 Creating Custom Key Maps corii ta arta situ epa sita cri tu epi sc aa a Fa so cu epa a ER AA dd AAA Ear 236 siqui H 236 A A Ed S eid i docte ete bab ia eti E EUR ea doe E Le U etn lai cet uice 237 COLSROWX Jui ETT 237 GENERA L Seco iuncti n RD E I I RN Hd da E URN DEN I ot NE 237 SPECIAL SOOO ecco rE aon II REM 238 MEAR Se Ub sce sees coves ees pease see ee wt cere vac co acca sure IMEEM 238 Keycomp Error Messages m 239 Sample mpu Eileen ve RP UICE URGERE iia 242 Output Ee cn 251 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 253 Physical Specifications PPP Aeon nn AA 253 Display Specili Al ION S insomnio daa iiad iaoiai 254 Pinot TORON A enu eects eo E LE LIU EE C E 254 Environmental Specifications sissisodan adnia S RP nace cin adenda cias ANM RES RR cabida 255 NISL eU Ss 255 AC Wall AdSte Eso usum I etre vede ii 255 cl ub f E LI D m 256 SUA MBIA GI occ A eee eee ect EUM E IE IU T 256 Plica e renee MEME EE 256 List of Valid VK Codes
39. C y Automatically adjust M cinck for elavlinht savinn APP Y E omer e e 2 30 PM A 8 Figure 3 19 Date Time Properties There is very little functional change from general desktop PC Date Time Properties options Adjust the settings and tap the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes the Date Time Properties screen to appear E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 94 Settings Control Panel Options al Dialing Access A Settings Control Panel Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Factory Default Settings Location Work Area Code 425 Tone Dialing Enabled Country Region 1 Disable Call Waiting Disabled Dialing Properties OK x Location TS MNNNNENNNNNEN New Remove Local settings ae Area code 425 Tone dialing Country Region f O Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial y Dialing patterns are Local Long Distance International 9 1FG 9 011 EFG Figure 3 20 Dialing Tap the Edit button to make changes to Dialing properties Tap the and follow the instructions in Help MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options Display Background Appearance Backlight Access A Settings Control Panel Display Icon Selec
40. Create and print the label Scan the MX8 Bluetooth address barcode label with the Bluetooth barcode reader The devices are paired The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Refer to the following section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Note After scanning the MX8 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired Free barcode creation software is available for download on the world wide web Search using the keywords barcode create MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Beep Type from Bluetooth Device Behavior Acknowledge label 1 beep Label rejected 2 beeps at low frequency Transmission error Beep will sound high low high low Link successful Beep will sound low medium high Link unsuccessful Beep will sound high low high low LED on Bluetooth Device Behavior Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz Linking in progress Off Disconnected or unlinked Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz Bluetooth transmission in progress Yellow LED blinks at the same rate as the paging beep 1 Hz Paging Green LED blinks once a second Disabled indication Upon startup if the scanner sounds a long tone this means the scanner has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode If the scanner is reset the sequence is repeated
41. Currently these are only modifier keys The only recognized names are KEYSHIFT KEYALT KEY2ND and KEYCONTROL and these specify the row and column of these 4 specific modifier keys in COLxROWX format Note the row and column for these keys can be outside the keymap limits specified in the GENERAL section since these are not loaded as part of the keymap proper MAP Section Map MAP MAP_NORMAL32 COLOROWO VK ESCAPE COLOROW1 VK F1 There will be several 4 to 7 MAP sections each defining the keymap for a given combination of modifier keys The keyboard driver requires keymaps for normal no modifiers SHIFT only 2ND only and 2ND SHIFT combined The CTRL modifier and ALT modifier do not have individual keymaps the keystrokes are passed to the operating system which is allowed to parse these keys according to Microsoft specifications for example ALT keys are defined to only pulldown menus with no other function The only recognized value names are MAP and COLxROWx defining a key code The only valid values for MAP are MAP NORMAL32 MAP ORANGE32 MX8 only no modifiers 32 key map MAP BLUE32 MXS only blue modifier 32 key map MXS only orange modifier 32 key map MAP SHIFT32 MXS only shift modifier 32 key map MAP ORANGESHIFT MXS only shift orange modifier 32 key map MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps 239 al In addition
42. Display at power on Disabled Network ID User Name Blank Password Blank Domain Blank Owner Properties 7 ok x Owner Properties lok x Owner Properties oK x Identification Notes Network 10 Identification Notes Network 10 Identification Notes Network ID Name 7 Notes Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Company Enter the user name password and domain provided by your network administrator Address At power on dox J Display owner notes Password Work phone Domain Home phone At power on O Display owner identification Figure 3 29 Owner Properties Enter the information and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 105 Password Access A Settings Control Panel Password Icon Set MX8 user access power up password properties Password and password settings are saved during a warm boot and a cold boot The screensaver password affects the Remote Desktop screensaver only Factory Default Settings Password Blank Enter at Power On Disabled Enter at Screen Saver Disabled Note Once a password is assigned each Settings option requires the password be entered before each Settings option can be accessed Password Properties i lok x Password S
43. Filename PAC Password Co comas Figure 5 16 Summit EAP FAST Credentials Enter the Username in the Credentials popup text entry box if desired Enter the Password if desired Tap OK For automatic PAC provisioning once a username password is authenticated the PAC information is stored on the mobile device The same username password must be used to authenticate each time When using automatic PAC provisioning once authenticated there is a file stored in the System directory with the PAC credentials If the username is changed that file must be deleted The filename is autoP 00 pac For manual PAC provisioning the PAC filename and password must be entered The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable The PAC file must not be Read Only Tap OK then tap Commit to save the new profile configuration Ensure the correct Active Profile 1s selected on the Main tab and perform a warmboot or Suspend Resume function See Also Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter 1f the username and password are left blank during setup PEAP MSCHAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility ok x Main Profile status Diags Global s Default y I New Rename Delete Scan Radio Bit Rat
44. Guide 26 Wireless Client and Network Setup P Wireless Client and Network Setup Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys Note If the access point uses authentication protocol LEAP WEP etc your network card must use the same authentication keys Please contact your IT department for WEP or LEAP encryption keys before contacting LXE WEP and LEAP are authentication protocols used to encrypt data sent and received from the mobile device to the access point WEP is disabled by default Note The MX8 uses the Summit Client Utility to configure the network card When the MX8 boots up for the first time and all programs are loaded the Wireless Information window may appear The client is attempting to connect to the local network Please refer to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration to continue setting up the client and network Terminal Emulation Setup Prerequisites e the mobile client network settings are configured and functional e the alias name or IP address Host Address and e the port number Telnet Port of the host system Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional If you are connecting over wireless LAN 802 11B make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point l From the 4 Programs run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop 2 Select Session Configure from the app
45. Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected or If installed RFTerm runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot If installed and enabled AppLock runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot The wireless client connects automatically during each reboot Bluetooth re connects to nearby paired devices automatically at the conclusion of each reboot If installed and pre configured Wavelink Avalanche connects remotely and downloads updates automatically during each reboot E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 72 Start Menu Program Options Communication Access A Programs Communication Note Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the MX8 Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE ActiveSync After a relationship partnership has been established with the MX8 and a desktop computer ActiveSync can synchronize using the radio link serial port or USB port on the MX8 Refer to ActiveSync Get Connected Process later in this chapter for more information and instruction To initiate synchronization or radio link from the mobile device that already has a relationship with the desktop computer tap Dd Programs Communication ActiveSync to begin the process For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help Connect Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection
46. Name gee Bluetooth Address 00 03 74 0 E6 4D COD 0x000000 Subclass COM part Status not paired Bluetooth Device Properties Menu Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by the user The data displayed is the result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 88 Settings Turn Off Bluetooth Button Settings Control Panel Options Bluetooth Devices Settings About Turn OFF Bluetocth Y Report when connection lost Report when reconnected V Report failure to reconnect IV Computer is connectable Computer is discoverable Prompt if devices request to pair Continuous search Computer Friendly Name Figure 3 15 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel Tap the button to toggle Bluetooth hardware On or Off Options Option Default Information Report when connection lost Enabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is lost A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Report when reconnected Disabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is re connected A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display
47. PCMCIA These are all DWORD fields described below The auto launch process goes as follows The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto launch First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present If not the registry entry is ignored If it is present and the Installed flag is not set auto launch makes a copy of the CAB file since it gets deleted by installation and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it If the Installed flag is set auto launch looks for the FileCheck file If it is present the CAB file is installed and that registry entry is complete If the FileCheck file is not present memory has been lost and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file Then the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry until all registry entries are analyzed To force execution every time for example for AUTOEXEC BAT use a FileCheck of dummy which will never be found forcing the item to execute For persist keys specifying EXE or BAT files the executing process will be started and then Launch will continue leaving the loading process to run independently For other persist keys including CAB files Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing This is important for example to ensure that a CAB file is installed before the EXE files from the CAB file are run The Order field is used to force a sequence of events Ord
48. Start Menu Program Options Transcriber Access AY Programs Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start Programs menu or tap the icon on the Desktop To make changes to the Transcriber application enable or disable the current Transcriber session etc tap the hand with a pen icon in the toolbar When the hand with a pen is active all touchscreen activity is captured read by the transcriber program Tap the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Access a Programs Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Tap the button to access Windows Explorer Help Taskbar Access A Settings Taskbar The Taskbar can be used to determine how the taskbar appears on the display Use the Advanced tab to clear the contents of the Documents menu Factory Default Settings General Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled Advanced Expand Control Panel Disabled There are a few changes in the CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options Taskbar and Start Menu General Advanced MA p Auto hide Y Show Clock Figure 3 2 Taskbar General Tab MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Start Menu Program Options Advanced Tab 7 y Expand Control Panel
49. Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings Control Panel menu option When it is unchecked the Control Panel Properties screen is displayed Taskbar and Start Menu lok x Advanced Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Documents Menu Clear Figure 3 3 Advanced Tab E EQ MX8RG A px lt gt About S Accessibility Accessibility E Battery pecu Certificates Date Time 2 Date Time Dialing iL Dialing Boky A A Input Panel A Display 9 Internet Options Input Panel Keyboard 9 internet Options Mappable Keys Sn Keyboard a ee 1 Mappable Keys a Network and Dial up Connections tt Mixer Settings 182 Owner al A Password bd P E Control pr 3 03 rm GA a The Result of Expand Control Panel One Result of Expand Control Panel checkbox enabled checkbox disabled Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Recently Opened Document folder MXS Reference Guide 78 Settings Control Panel Options Settings Control Panel Options Access A Settings Control Panel or My Device Control Panel link Getting Help Please tap the box to get Help when changing Settings options Option Function About Software hardware and installed versions of hardware and software No
50. When disabled after being enabled the MX8 stops searching after 30 minutes This option draws power from the Main Battery Continuous Search Disabled Computer Friendly Empty The name or identifier entered in this space by the System Name Administrator is used exclusively by Bluetooth devices and during Bluetooth communication Note The Device Name listed in Start Settings Control Panel System Device Name is not used during Bluetooth operation Note Owner Identification name listed in Start Settings Control Panel Owner Identification is not used during Bluetooth operation About Bluetooth Devices Settings About opyright 2006 2007 LXE Inc The Bluetooth word mark and logos lare owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc aiting label example ly Figure 3 16 Bluetooth About Panel This panel lists the assigned Computer Friendly Name that other devices may discover during their Discovery and Query process the Bluetooth device MAC address and software version levels The data cannot be edited by the user E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 90 Settings Control Panel Options Easy Pairing and Auto Reconnect The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the end user taps the Discover button It can auto reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of and then returned within range Pairing supports SPP devices only Up to
51. a good scan beep from an external scanner and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep from the MX8 on the same data Use Illumination LEDs The default setting is Enabled Integrated imager may use illumination LEDs when scanning a barcode MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A COMI Tab 147 COM1 Tab Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner COM1 tab Factory Default Settings COMI Port external serial port Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Bits 8 Scanner Control OK E Main COMA Barcode vibration Stop Bits e 1 2 Parity e None Odd e Data Bits Os e Figure 4 3 Scanner Control COM1 Integrated laser scanner default values are 9600 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and No parity If these values are changed the default values are restored after a cold boot or reflashing Note COMI does not support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 148 Barcode Tab Access Barcode Tab A Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode tab The Scanner application Wedge can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside the Wedge software The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration barcode in the n
52. action The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing This user mode entry 1s attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the application name or command line 227 Level LOG_ERROR Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty LOG_ERROR Registry read failure The registry read failed The registry information read when this message is logged is the application information Itthe Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty this error is logged The other application information is not required If the AppName value is not available AppLock cannot switch into user mode LOG ERROR Reset system work area failure The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode AppLock was unable to adjust this area LOG ERROR Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing LOG EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Show taskb
53. and press the Power key to turn the MX8 On Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing The MXS contains Bluetooth version 2 0 with Enhanced Data Rate EDR up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air Bluetooth device connection or pairing can occur at distances up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight The wireless client retains network connectivity while Bluetooth is active The user will not be able to select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the MX8 However the MX8 supports authentication requests from pairing devices If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption the MX8 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode Maximum encryption is 128 bit Encryption is based on the length of the user s passcode Bluetooth will simultaneously support one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner either as a slave or as a master Bluetooth device See Chapter 3 System Configuration control panel section titled Bluetooth Notes e The MXS8 does not have a Bluetooth managed LED e The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation the Scan LED on the MX8 does not illuminate e Barcode data captured by the Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the MX8 Scanner Properties control panel applet e Multiple beeps may be heard during a barcode scan using the Bluetooth scanner beeps from the Bluetooth scanner as the barcode data is accepted rejected and other beeps from the MX8 during final barcode data manip
54. appears black when the mobile device is in suspend mode MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Configuration Power Supply The LXE MXS uses two batteries for operation Main Battery Pack A replaceable 3000 mAh Lithium Ion Li Ion battery pack The battery pack recharges while in the MX8 when the mobile device is connected to the MX8 optional external AC DC power source The main battery pack can be removed from the MX8 and inserted in the MX8 Multi Charger which simultaneously charges up to four battery packs in five hours The status indicator is illuminated when the backup battery is being charged by the main battery pack A new main battery pack can be fully charged in 5 hours when it is in an MX8 connected to AC power and 5 hours when it is in the MX8 multi charger Backup Battery An internal 160 mAh Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH backup battery The backup battery is recharged directly by the MX8 main battery pack Recharging maintains the battery near full charge at all times When the backup battery is fully drained it may take up to 5 hours to recharge The capability to discharge the backup battery is provided to allow the user to condition the battery in order to recover full battery capacity The backup battery must be replaced by qualified service personnel The battery has a minimum 2 year service life Note An uninterrupted external power source wall AC adapters transfers power to the computer s internal charging c
55. assumption that your new device is pre configured and requires only accessory installation e g trigger handle and a power source LXE recommends that installation or removal of accessories be performed on a clean well lit surface When necessary protect the work surface the mobile device and components from electrostatic discharge In general the sequence of events is 1 Inserta fully charged battery Always put a fully charged battery in the mobile device at the beginning of the shift or workday Connect an external power source to the unit 1f available If the screen does not automatically display tap the Power key Calibrate the touchscreen A white screen will appear during the boot process until all CAB files and applications are loaded and installed Wireless client setup screens may appear and disappear while files are loading 6 After all files are loaded and the Microsoft Windows CE Desktop is displayed adjust audio volume and other parameters if desired 7 Pair Bluetooth devices 8 Setup wireless client parameters 9 Setup terminal emulation parameters 10 Setup mappable keys 11 Save changed settings to the registry NEO If needed change the Time and Date from it s default value by tapping the a Settings Control Panel Date Time icon a CU My Device LAEZ Pairing Summit Client Utility y r 4 RF TERM z L Recycle Bin My zi Documents LXE RFTerm 4 tl Internet Explorer
56. codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control key combinations Char Hex Cto Control Action Key NUL 0 Na NULL character Ctrl Shift VK_CONTROL 0x11 down VK_A 0x41 down SOH 1 A Start Of Heading WM CHAR 0x1 VK A 0x41 up VK CONTROL 0x11 up STX 2 B Start of TeXt Ctrl b ETX 3 C End of TeXt Ctrl c EOT 4 D End Of Transmission Ctrl d ENQ 3 E ENQuiry Ctrl e ACK 6 F ACKnowledge Ctrl f BEL 7 AG BELI rings terminal bell Ctrl g BS 8 H BackSpace non destructive Ctrl h HT 9 A Horizontal Tab move to next tab position Ctrl i LF a J Line Feed Ctrl j VT b K Vertical Tab Ctrl k FF c L Form Feed Ctrl 1 CR d AM Carriage Return Ctrl m SO e AN Shift Out Ctrl n SI f O Shift In Ctrl o DLE 10 P Data Link Escape Ctrl p DCI 11 Q Device Control 1 normally XON Ctrl q DC2 12 R Device Control 2 Ctrl r MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Appendix B Technical Specifications 259 al Char Hex MEE Control Action Key DC3 13 AS Device Control 3 normally XOFF Ctrl s DC4 14 T Device Control 4 Ctrl t NAK 15 U Negative AcKnowledge Ctrl u SYN 16 AV SYNchronous id
57. connector Connector B Firmly push the power cable connector pin into connector Plug the 2 prong cable into an AC wall outlet Connector C Align the RS 232 serial cable end carefully to an appropriate serial port on a desktop laptop computer for ActiveSync communication Press the ends together and hand tighten the screws on either side of the serial cable until the MX8 is securely connected to the serial device MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Setup Connecting the Audio Cable and a Headset See section titled Set the Audio Speaker Volume Note The audio option draws power from the main battery The headset consists of an earpiece a microphone and an attached cable The headset attaches to the audio cable which attaches to the MX8 Use the control panel option Mixer to set up mono headphone The Summit Client supports mono only Figure 1 18 Audio Cable and Headset Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX8 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before continuing Connector B Optional Firmly push the power cable connector pin into the MX8 connector Plug the 2 prong cable into an AC wall outlet Connector C Align Connector C and the headset quick connect cable end Firmly push the cable ends together until they click and lock in place Adj
58. control panel settings and changes are saved Warm boot is also called warm reset Hold down the Enter key and then the Power key until the screen blanks Release the keys and the MXS warm boots or Tap Start Run and using the virtual keyboard or SIP type WARMBOOT Tap the OK button and the MX8 warm boots This command is not case sensitive Temporary data not saved is lost All programs are re launched Previously saved user settings are restored Cold boot is also called cold reset Hold down the Blue key the Scan key and the Power key until the screen blanks Release the keys and the MX8 cold boots or Tap Start Run and using the virtual keyboard or SIP type COLDBOOT Tap the OK button and the MX8 cold boots This command is not case sensitive There may be small delays while the wireless client connects to the network authorization for Voxware enabled applications complete Wavelink Avalanche management of the MX startup completes and Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Saving Changes to the Registry 49 Reset to Default Settings Important Because of the extreme nature of resetting the MX8 to factory default settings LXE recommends that this process be used only as an emergency procedure and the Warm Boot be used whenever necessary 1 Tap Dd Run and using the virtual keyboard or SIP type CLEARHIVE Tap the OK button This command is not case sensitive
59. e Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted the MX8 is always drawing power from the batteries On e New batteries must be fully charged prior to use e Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX8 to conserve the main battery and recharge the backup battery The backup battery receives power from the main battery e When the MX is connected to AC power and the main battery is being hotswapped do not disconnect AC power from the MX8 until a main battery is secured in the battery well e Ni MH backup battery replacement must be performed by qualified service personnel When to Use This Guide As the reference for LXE s MX8 computer this guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality Use this reference guide as you would any other source book reading portions to learn about the MX8 and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject This guide takes you through all aspects of installation and configuration for the LXE MX8 Operation and safety instructions for the general user are contained in the MX8 User s Guide This chapter Introduction describes this reference guide s structure contains initial setup instruction briefly describes data entry processes and explains how to get help Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout describes the function and layout of the MX8 components controls and connectors Also describes
60. examples assume that the scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier Symbology EAN 128 EAN 13 Intrlv 2 of 5 All ICD JE0 10 Code93 Enable Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Min length 1 4 1 1 Max length all all all 10 Strip Code ID Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Strip Leading 3 0 3 3 Strip Barcode Data 123 qe 456 Strip Trailing 0 0 3 3 Prefix aaa bbb coc ddd Suffix www XXX yyy ZZZ Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table below are examples of scanned barcode data and results of these manipulations Barcode Symbology Raw Scanner Data Resulting Data EAN 128 C11234567890123 bbb1234567890xxx EAN 128 C111234567890123 bbb11234567890xxx EAN 128 C1123 lt rejected gt too short EAN 13 E01234567890987 ccc E04567890yyy EAN 13 JE01231234567890987 ccc E0234567890yyy EAN 13 E01234 ccc EOyyy 12 5 104444567890987654321 lt rejected gt too long 12 5 104444567890123 ddd7890zzz 12 5 110444 dddzzz 12 5 11022245622 ddd45zzz Code 93 160123456 lt rejected gt disabled Code 93 160444444 lt rejected gt disabled Code 39 A01234567890 aaa4567890www Code 39 full ASCII A41231234567890 aaa1234567890www Code 39 A4 lt rejected gt too short Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from
61. folder automatically run during a warm boot and a cold boot They are lost after a return to factory defaults with CLEARHIVE EXE These applications are launched at different times during startup applications placed in the Windows Startup folder run before LAUNCH EXE executes Applications stored in System Startup run after LAUNCH EXE executes E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 68 Installed Software Optional Software AppLock Option The AppLock program is accessed by the user or the AppLock Administrator at bootup or upon completion of a warm boot Set parameters using the Administration option in the Control Panel See Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction Bluetooth Option Only installed on a Bluetooth equipped MX8 The System Administrator can Discover and Pair targeted Bluetooth devices for each MX8 The System Administrator can enable disable Bluetooth settings and assign a Computer Friendly Name for each MX8 The Bluetooth control panel can be accessed by tapping Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or by doubletapping the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the Desktop JAVA Option Installed by LXE Files can be accessed by tapping Start Programs JEM CE Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console A folder of JAVA examples and Plug ins is also installed with the JAVA option LXE does not support all JAVA applications running on the mobile device LXE RFTerm Option Installed by LXE The application c
62. if desired Tap the X button to cancel Exit Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 130 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Avalanche Update using File Settings Access Start Avalanche File Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the mobile device LXE recommends changing and then saving the changes reboot before connecting to the network Alternatively the Mobile Device Server can be disabled until needed refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details available on the Wavelink Avalanche website Menu Options Connection Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server Set the order in which serial ports or RF are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device Server Execution Unavailable in this release LXE recommends using AppLock which is resident on each Windows CE mobile device See Chapter 6 AppLock Server Contact Setup synchronization scheduled Mobile Device Server contact suspend and reboot settings Startup Shutdown Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown Scan Config This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console Not currently supported by LXE Display Set up the Windows display at startup on connect and during normal mode The
63. in lowest to highest number order Internet Default is Disabled Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE When the checkbox is enabled the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available See the section titled End user Internet Explorer EUIE for more details E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 214 Multi Application Configuration al Option Explanation Launch See following section titled Launch Button Button Note AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other LXE Control Panels Global Key Default is Ctrl Spc Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching between applications The Global Key default key sequence must be defined by the AppLock Administrator The Global key is presented to the end user as the Activation key Global Default is 10 seconds Enter the number of seconds that Applications must wait Delay before starting to run after reboot Note Delay Global may not be available in all versions of AppLock You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application lowest Order launched and setting the delay to 0 for all other applications See Boot Options Input Panel Default is Disabled Enable check to show the Keyboard option on the Switchpad menu When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled for e
64. is not important you can put these files in the System WStartup folder on the internal Flash card This is parsed by the Launch utility and these programs are started or executed ClearHive EXE Command line utility which causes the Registry to be reset to original factory settings The command is not case sensitive Run Windows ClearHive exe using the virtual keypad or Soft Input Panel SIP Tap Enter or OK Passwords are lost upon reset to factory settings If a password is set that password must be entered to begin the ClearHive reset process GrabTime EXE Note This utility affects the behavior of GrabTime at warmboot After a coldboot GrabTime is disabled The MXS has a GrabTime utility which can automatically synchronize the MX8 with a worldwide time server via an Internet connection at boot up By default GrabTime for time synchronization at boot up is Off To enable GrabTime to run automatically at boot up run Windows grabtime exe and perform a warm boot Enter Power For more detail see LAUNCH EXE earlier in this chapter Synchronize with a local time server e Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime ini from the My Device Windows folder on the MX8 to the host PC e Edit GrabTime ini on the host PC to add the local time server s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers You can then optionally delete the remainder of the list e Copy the modified GrabTime ini to the My Device System folder on the MX8
65. is still required 128MB mini SD Card R MX8A226SD128MB 512MB mini SD Card R MX8A227SD512MB 1GB mini SD Card R MX8A2288DIGB VoxBrowser M English amp Americas VOXBROWSER ENG VoxBrowser Rest of the World VOXBROWSER ROW Single ear single headband headset with noise canceling microphone HX1ASOISNGBHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Single ear dual headband headset with noise canceling microphone HX1A502DUALBHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Dual ear behind the head headset with noise canceling microphone HX1ASO3BTHHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Replacement foam block for 502 dual band headsets qty 1 HX1A504AHSBLOCKFOAM Replacement head yoke for dual band 502 headset qty 1 HX1A505DUALYOKE MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A power supply Getting Help 41 Replacement head yoke for single band 501 headset qty 1 HX1A506SINGLEYOKE Replacement windscreen for all headset microphones 10 Pack HX1A508WINDSCREEN 10 Replacement windscreen for all headset microphones 50 Pack HX1A509WINDSCREEN50 Replacement foam ear piece cover for 501 and 502 headsets 10 pack HX1AS10FOAMEARI10 Replacement foam ear piece cover for 501 and 502 headsets 50 pack HX1A511FOAMEARS0 Mobile Bluetooth Barcode Readers and Accessories PowerScan 7000BT Scanner RS 232 with pointer 8700A301 SCNRBTSRI PowerScan 7000BT Base Station RS23
66. on the handle Pressing the trigger activates the scanner and functions the same as the Scan key on the keypad With the handle installed the Scan key on the keypad remains active The trigger duplicates the operation The handle is built of a durable flexible plastic The handle will not detach from the MXS if the unit is dropped The trigger handle is a mechanical device Battery or external A C power is not required for operation of the trigger handle The trigger handle does not need to be removed when replacing the main battery pack Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX8 or the handstrap is attached but not both Figure 1 10 Trigger Handle Attach Points Handle Installation Equipment Needed Torque wrench capable of torquing to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m Place the MX8 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface 2 Remove the main battery pack 3 Slide the locking tab on the underside of the pistol grip into the slot at the back of the battery compartment and press it firmly into place 4 Ensure that the battery can be inserted into the battery compartment before securing the pistol grip handle into place 5 Attach the pistol grip handle to the MX8 as shown above with the two screws provided 6 Torque the Pan Head Screws to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m 7 Test the handle s connection making sure the MX is securely connected to the handle Periodically check the pistol grip handle for wea
67. or CRL To trust certificates issued from this certification authority install this CA certificate chain To download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL select the certificate and encoding method CA Certificate Current johndoe Encoding method ODER OBase 64 Download CA certificate Download CA certificate chain Download latest base CRL Download latest delta CRL Figure 5 29 Download CA Certificate Screen Tap the DER button To download the CA certificate tap on the Download CA certificate link File Download Security Warning x Do you want to open or save this file Name certnew cer Type Security Certificate 1 10 KB From 100 100 100 100 Open Save Cocel While files from the Intemet can be useful this file type can Y potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Figure 5 30 Download CA Certificate Save to Desktop Tap the Save button and save the certificate to the desktop PC Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the certificate file name and file location is required in later steps E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide Certificates 196 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device Copy the certificate file from the desktop PC to the mobile device Import the certificate by navigating to Start Control Panel Certificates 3 b 5 f ri Certificates
68. password are left blank during setup MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 193 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating the Wireless Zero Config application is enabled and the MXS is not connected to a network You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to manage wireless connectivity To use Wireless Zero Config first open the Summit Client Utility Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down box A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly Tap OK Tap the Power button to place the MX8 in Suspend then tap the Power button to wake the MXS from Suspend mode deua The Wireless Zero Config utility begins E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 194 Certificates al Certificates an Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for communication 4 It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of ES certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication Date Time will fail Root Certificates Download a Root CA Certificate The easiest way to get the root CA certificat
69. software development the files LXEAPI H and LXEAPI LIB are available on the accessories CD which are the C C include files and the link library for the LXEAPI respectively Note that this DLL is installed in mobile device images with a version number of 1 2 or higher as displayed on the screen during bootup A full SDK on the accessories CD is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C 4 0 which is available free on the Microsoft website Clearing Registry Settings Run ClearHive exe application This application will put all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults The Touch Recalibration screen will appear after the system boots up MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Reflash the Mobile Device 141 Reflash the Mobile Device Note When reflashing LXE recommends using a SD Flash card that is greater than 64MB Files to be loaded on the Flash card are OSImage NB0 BLlmage NB0 MX8Update exe The MXS starts the operating system upon every warm boot or cold boot If available always perform MX8 updates when there is a fully charged backup battery and or a dependable external power source connected to the MX8 The bootloader and OS are written to onboard flash using the utility MX8Update EXE Preparation LXE recommends that installation of the Mini SD Flash card be performed on a clean well lit surface xit 128 we MX ee ee Figure 3 51 SD Card Location Place the mobile device in Suspend Mode and remove
70. the signal strength signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the drop down menu Avalanche Update Settings OK ES Shortcuts Adapters 10 2 100 112 00 60 b3 00 f1 1b CERTNET1 BSSID 00 02 2d 7f a7 ba Link Speed 11 0 Mbps Figure 3 50 Status Display Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile device Speed is dependent on signal strength MXS Reference Guide 140 API Calls Troubleshooting Cold Boot If a device managed by Avalanche is cold booted a warmboot MUST be performed following the coldboot Failure to perform the warmboot will leave the device in an undetermined configuration and it may not perform as expected If the intention is to stop using Avalanche to manage the device configuration please see Enabler Uninstall Process earlier in this section API Calls See Also LXE CE API Programming Guide E SW WINAPIPG The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE specific API calls for the mobile device It is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation Details of many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft s documentation The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in LXEAPLZIP which is in the standard Windows CE image on the mobile device For ease of
71. the Alph key to toggle between Alpha and Numeric mode When using a sequence of keys that do not include the Alph key but does include a sticky key press the sticky key first then the rest of the key sequence To Get This MX8 Key Press These de and Then Functi Press This Key unenon Blue Alpha Power 3 Diamond 1 MAP Mappable Diamond 2 Default is MAP MAP Mappable mt tt Diamond 3 or Default is MAP MAP Mappable TESSEN Ooo pop S T ee pee Power Suspend Field Exit default VK PAUSE Volume Adjust Mode Scan Key 4 Display Backlight Brightness Adjust Mode Scan Key 5 Toggle Blue Mode Blue Toggle Orange Mode Orange Toggle Shift Mode Shft Tapping the Power key when in any sticky mode Blue Orange Shift etc either turns the device On when Off or places it in Suspend when active Orange Scan enters Volume Adjust Mode Use Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust volume Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mode Blue Scan enters Backlight Brightness Adjust Mode Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust brightness Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mode E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 232 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad d To Get This MX8 Key Press These Keys and Then Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha Press This Key Delete P Del Home o p own Arrow End Lo p Pp Arrow Page Up Lo
72. the main battery pack Lift the rubber barrier and pull the Mini SD card out of the slot Do not remove the rubber barrier Procedure Note If the image to be updated is a Far East Language image 48M check the FarEast checkbox before updating to a Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean or Japanese version of the OS The update process may take between 6 and 10 minutes when FarEast is checked 8 Place the Mini SD flash card with new image files on it into the SD slot The label on the SD card is facing up 9 Launch MX8UPDATE EXE in My Device Storage Card e Important Ifa failure occurs during the update DO NOT COLD BOOT Follow the instructions on the screen to Exit the update utility Restart the update utility 10 Tap Start to start the update Tap Exit to exit without updating E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 142 Reflash the Mobile Device MX8 Image Update MX8 Image Update Press Start Button to Start Exit Update OS Image Please Wait Button to exit O FarEast Start Figure 3 52 MX8 Image Update When the flash update is complete remove the SD card if desired replace the rubber barrier and replace the main battery The unit automatically performs a cold boot Command Line Interface Notes e My Device System is a priority searching location for the source file so if My Device Storage Card is an intended source make sure there is no corresponding file in My Device Storage Card e If main bat
73. the scanner triggers a good scan beep from the external scanner and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab 161 Length Based Barcode Stripping Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two barcodes with the same symbology but with different discrete lengths This procedure is not applicable for barcodes with variable lengths falling between a maximum value and a minimum value Example 1 e Anormal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired barcode ID e Next a custom barcode symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings Example 2 For the purposes of this example the following sample barcode parameters will be used EANI28 and Code128 barcodes Some of the barcodes start with 00 and some start with 01 The barcodes are different lengths e 34 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 18 e 26 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 10 e 24 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 8 This 24 character barcode is CODE128 e 20 character length with first two characters 00 strip first 0 no characters and last 4 On the Barcode tab set Enable Code ID to AIM Create fo
74. the user s certificate store Does not install the root CA s certificate You must be an administrator to generate or use a key in the local machine store Additional Options Request Format CMC OPKCS10 Hash Algorithm SHA 1 Only used to sign request C Save request to a file Attributes usd in Friendly Name Figure 5 38 Advanced Certificate Details For the Certificate Template select User Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes Type the full path on the local PC where the private key 1s to be copied Also specify the private key filename Be sure to note the name used for the private key file for example MXSUSER PVK The certificate file created later in this process must be given the same name for example MX8USER CER DO NOT check Enable strong private key protection Make any other desired changes and tap the Submit button MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 201 pal Potential Scripting Violation Potential Scripting Violation Ss a Figure 5 39 Script Warnings If any script notifications occur tap the Yes button to continue the certificate request Create Private Key Password Figure 5 40 Script Warnings When prompted for the private key password e Tap None if you do not wish to use a password or e Enter and confirm your desired password then tap OK Microsoft
75. the width of the beam Figure 1 30 Scan Status LED The Scan Status LED oval shaped LED below keypad turns red when the laser beam is on Following a barcode scan and read the Scan Status LED turns green for two seconds and the MX8 beeps or vibrates indicating a successful scan When the scan light is OFF and there is no successful decode then the Scan Status LED turns off and a different beep sequence is heard The laser engine and Scan Status LED automatically turn off after a certain time out for unsuccessful decode and will turn off immediately after successful decode The scanner is ready to scan again after the Scan key or trigger on the handle if installed is released Voice Data Data is entered into the MX8 by speaking into the headset s microphone when prompted Please contact your System Administrator if assistance is needed with the voice software Tethered Scanners Tethered scanners connected to the MX8 I O port are not supported on the MX8 device MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Getting Help 39 Getting Help All LXE user guides are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed downloaded from the LXE ServicePass website Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD You can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD in the file titled Contacting LXE This information is also available on the LXE website Explanations of terms and acronyms
76. to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between Double click this icon to test your double click pial settings If this icon es doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Figure 3 27 Mouse Properties Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen Tap OK to save the settings or tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 103 al Network and Dialup Connections Access A Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections Set network driver properties and network access properties Select a connection to use or create a new connection on the MX8 Serial 1 Serial 1 57600 115200 27 connect Y 5 2 38 em DA Figure 3 28 Network and Dialup Connections Tap OK to save the settings or tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help Create a Connection Option 1 On the mobile device select 4 Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections A window is displayed showing the existing connections 2 Assuming the one you want does not exist double tap Make New Connection 3 Give the new connection an appropriate name My Connection a 9600 etc Tap the Direct Connection radio button Tap the Next button 4 Fromthe popup menu choose the port you want to connect to On
77. to configure applications that consume system resources to be terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end user s request Error conditions may generate a topmost popup requiring an end user response memory resource issues requiring an end user response etc Also at the administrator s discretion these types of applications can be started manually see Manual Launch by the end user End User Internet Explorer EUIE AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer s address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Administrator applet The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box When the Internet checkbox is enabled the Menu and Status check boxes are available Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE men
78. to each end of the strap connectors Check the closed loop fastener retainer bracket and clip connections frequently If they have loosened they must be tightened before the MX8 is placed into service again If the handstrap gets worn or damaged it must be replaced MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Setup 15 Inserting a Fully Charged Battery Press the Power key after the battery is inserted into the MX Note On first use the MX8 batteries should be charged with an external power source i e AC Adapter 5 hours for the main battery and 7 hours for the backup battery New main battery packs alone must be charged prior to first use this process takes up to five hours in an MX8 Multi Charger Figure 1 12 Main Battery Pack The MX8 Battery Compartment is located at the bottom of the back of the computer The main battery functions as the battery well cover Push the locking tab towards the I O connector until it stays in place Place the battery in the battery well making sure the tab at the top of the battery pack fits into the slot at the top end of the battery well With a hinging motion slip the battery down into the battery well until the locking tab clicks into place and the battery pack is secured to the MX8 The backup battery is trickle charged by the main battery Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX8 to conserve the main battery and charge the backup battery The Status LED indic
79. together More than one in a configuration string is not allowed The User Interface will not prevent it but results would not be as expected as only the first is used in parsing to match the string e The question mark wildcard may be used to match any single character in the incoming data For example the data AB D will match ABCD ABcD or ABOD but not ABDE e The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured e Note that the Code ID if any are configured is ignored by this dialog regardless of the setting of Strip Code ID in the Symbologies dialog According to the sequence of events specified above the Code ID must not be included in the barcode data being matched because when the matching test occurs the Code ID has already been stripped If Strip Code ID is disabled then the barcode data to match must include the Code ID If Strip Code ID is enabled the data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab 155 Add Prefix Suffix Control See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter Add Prefix suffix Figure 4 8 Symbology Prefix and Suffix Control Use this option to specify a string of text hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning prefix or the end suffix of the barcode d
80. user intervention allowed Integrated scanner type is identified About LXE Software hardware versions and network IP No user intervention allowed Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard audio display or mouse functions Administration LXE AppLock Administration utility See Chapter 4 for details Battery View voltage and status of the main and backup batteries Bluetooth Discover and manage Bluetooth devices Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication COMI Displays the current settings for the COMI 1 0 port See Scanner Date Time Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Display Set background graphic and scheme Set backlight properties and timers Input Panel Select the current key data input method Internet Options Set General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity Keyboard Select a Key Map or font Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Mappable Keys Assign multiple key presses to Diamond keys Mixer Adjust the input and output parameters volume side tone and record gain for headphone software and microphone Mouse Set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen Network and Dial Up Set network driver properties and network access properties Options Owner Set the mobile device owner details name phone etc
81. volume and sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events Note Change the font displayed on the screen by choosing Dd Settings Control Panel Keyboard and then the Key map dropdown list E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 80 About GUID Langu Settings Control Panel Options 4 Access A Settings Control Panel About Displays hardware and software details Tab Title Contents Software GUID Windows CE Version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version Language Language indicates any pre installed Asian fonts Hardware CPU Type Codec Type Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions NET Framework Version and Internet Explorer version Network IP Current network connection adapter IP and MAC address Software Hardware Versions nyele MX8500217 PXA27x 10 11 2007 12 00 BootLoader version MX8500120 PXA27x 10 11 2007 12 00 Compile versi MX8500217 PXA27x 10 11 2007 12 00 lage ANSI 1252 United States OEM 437 US English only ox x mm n ok x About od x PA Hardware versions N W IP Software Hardware versions n Software Hardware Versions ME DE Intel Xscale PXA270 revC5 S20MHz NET Compact Framework v2 0 Adapter SDCCFIOG iu IP 172 16 38 103 Windows CE version Codec Type Internet Explorer MSIE6 0 Windows CE 5 0 build 0 patched WM9705 rev 4 4
82. word failure These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather than with an error For processing level messages Enter is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and Exit is logged at the end just before the return of the function specified in the message Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock LOG_EX Error reading hotkey using default A hotkey is required If there is a failure reading the LOG_ERROR hotkey the internal factory default is used App Command Line lt Command Command line of the application being locked LOG_PROCESSING line gt App Application name gt Name of the application being locked LOG PROCESSING dwProcessID lt gt Device ID of the application being locked LOG EX Encrypt exported key len lt gt Size of encrypt export key LOG EX Encrypt password length lt gt The length of the encrypted password LOG EX Encrypted data len lt gt Length of the encrypted password LOG EX hProcess lt gt Handle of the application being locked LOG EX Key pressed lt gt A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey LOG_EX processing RETA REE RS door ox The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_EX file has been opened successfully
83. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7 Blue32 Map6 hex 7C 7B 7A 25 14 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7D 7E EC 27 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BP00 00 1B 39 00 00 306 00 00 00 00 00 00 00500 00 00 00 00 30 00 00 DE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 BD 00 00 00 BB 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Flag6 hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 B7 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00500 005 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 X 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 X 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 fe SALEESZ Map7 hex 81 80 7F 24 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 82 83 BA 23 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 34 37 00 EE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 X 32 35 387 30 F0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 33 36 39 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Flag7 hex 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10500 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 10 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7 ShiftOrange Mapl2 hex N 86 85 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 87 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
84. 184 Figute 5 15 Configure Summit Profile for EAP EAST uibem P ee HE DRE 185 Figure 5 16 Summit EAP EAST Credentials oreet b HE PROUD e OE REL 186 Figure 5 17 Configure Summit Profile for PEAP MSCHAD iere OTi renti e bens 186 Piste 5 18 PEAP MSCHAP Credencial PEE c Ras e Se lis 187 Figure 5 19 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP eese 188 Fip res5 20 LEAP Credential oiriin prb xt ep aeie od action 188 Figure 5 21 Configure a Summit Profile with WPA PSK Encryption eeeeeeeeeeenereen eee 189 Eip rs3 22 Summit PSK Entry Dialop ni ias 189 Figure 5 23 Configure Summit Profile with PEAP GTQ iiie oerte ipeo rut cr pne lebe uo et baee vasespeabsetinan ide 190 Fiure S A PEAP GTC Credits olas 190 Figure 5 25 Configure Summit Profile with EAPSTES escoria pne Er te Reap EP ee ER ebbe hp co Mare 191 Figure S 20 EAP TES Credentials Dial nta 192 Figure 5 27 Losgonto C critica te AMO o eed d Pet tek Ere Rr ep Pe paesa iria iaa 194 Ligure 5 28 Cerb cate Services Welcome SEO essa dansa NO RORIS PR URN Et iodo 194 Figure 5 29 Download CA Certificate Screen sinisesse oni iie ORENSE E N IEN IINE X PUE 195 Figure 5 30 Download CA Certificate Save to Desktop iere ES ana ORUM Reine 195 Figure S 31 Certificate SONES d oi toas in PR DO A a ERE OPERE ANE WAM DNI cas 196 Figure 5 32 Import Cerificate Froma Elle iii ceo rt renato 196 Figute 5 39 Browsing to Certificate Location sisi otitis 197 F
85. 2 A dialog appears explaining the restore to default settings process Select either Yes or Cancel 3 Selecting Yes causes the reset process to continue and factory default settings are restored when the device powers on again Selecting Cancel stops the reset process All previous user settings authorizations and configurations wireless connection settings Bluetooth relationship settings and Control Panel parameter settings are cleared 4 Programs begin installing and messages are shown on the display as each is installed When the CE Desktop appears or the final application opens the reset is complete Calibrating the touchscreen will need to be performed during the reset process If needed change the MX8 Time and Date from it s factory default value by tapping the a Settings Control Panel Date Time icon Note Coldboot exe vs ClearHive exe ClearHive exe utility clears the registry and coldboots the MX8 Coldboot exe utility clears the registry resets the persist keys in the Launch reg file to factory defaults and coldboots Saving Changes to the Registry The MXS saves the registry every time a Suspend Resume function is initiated The registry save process takes less than 10 seconds The registry is automatically saved every 20 minutes It is also saved every tenth time the registry settings are changed Registry settings are changed when control panel property e g Date Time parameters are changed by the user and
86. 2 without universal power 8700A501 BASERS232 supply PowerScan 7000BT Base Station Power Supply Std US 120V 8700A502PSACUS PowerScan 7000BT RS232 Cable for Base Station DB9S Coil 8 8700A001 CBL8DA9F PowerScan 7000BT Battery Charger with Power Supply Four Station 8700A503CHGR4US US Std PowerScan 7000BT Battery Pack 8700A504BATT Bluetooth Standard Range Fuzzy Logic laser 8810A326SCNRBTFZ Bluetooth Auto Range LORAX laser 8820A327SCNRBTER Spare battery 8800A376BATTERY US AC Power Cord use with 8800A301ACPS and 8800A05IPOWERCORD 8800A379CHGRBASE Single Slot Universal Battery Charger adapter cup for 8800 Battery 8800A377CHGRADPTRCUP Single slot battery charger with International power supply 8800A378CHGRISLOT Universal Battery charger 4 Slot Base Power Supply included no AC 8800A379CHGRBASE power cord LS3408 Scanner Holster for Belt 8200A501HOLSTRBELT Mounted Take Up Reel Mounted applications 8000A501INDREEL Auto Sense Intellistand Hands Free Scanning 8500A505STANDSMT CBL ASSY DAO9F 9ft cradle to terminal 8500A051CBL9DA9F Desk Cradle Radio Charging Multi Interface requires data cable and 8800A001 CRADLERCMI E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 42 Getting Help al Desk Cradle Charge Only Multi Interface requires data cable and 8800A002CRADLECMI power supply Forklift Cradle Radio Charging Multi Interface requires data cable 8800A003CRADLEVRCMI and power supply Forklift Cradle Cha
87. 229 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level X after Ctrl L Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Ret from password lt gt Return value from password dialog LOG_EX Decrypt data len lt gt Length of decrypted password LOG_EX Window handle to The window handle that is passed to the enumeration LOG EX enumwindows x function This message can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot application lock failures WM_WINDOWPOSCHG Output the window size after it has been adjusted by LOG_EX adjusted x AppLock AppLock Registry Settings This system application runs at startup via the launch feature of LXE Windows CE devices When the launch feature is installed on the mobile device the following registry settings are created The launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image HKI HK HKI EY LOCA EY LOCA EY LOCA MACHINE Software LXE Persist Filename AppLock exe MACHINE Software LXE Persist Installed MACHINE Software LXE Persist FileCheck AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters that are needed by the application These registry settings are as follows HKI HK EY OCA OCA m Yu MACHINE Software LXE Administration AppName MACHINE Software LXE AppCommandLine In addition to the re
88. 24 Volume Sounds Properties em pies 24 Cortilicate SUOLBS cipes pieni tp ERE EL ede eR tum eto REOR iae E HO INED HDI debe coi 27 View Ceortilicato Detalla ritieni P a rei n ae EFL Lor Me E 28 Bluetooth Devices Display Before Discovering Devices essere 29 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label accionaria WE OH ds 33 About tab and Bluetooth Address cin c e taroen ote Ho EE 34 Input Panel Virtual Keyboard ia coaih sonent eE pH Orc aaa 36 oca Beatma sn E tonic HER ETE E FEE thee 38 Eienred 30 Scan Status L ED O o EHE AU 38 Eie 2 1 System lat abe so oo oro tetitas 43 iar 2 2 O E EUH 46 Ficus 2 9 MiniSD ead Loco oops enee iiae aoon TEATE Ea eE EE UENIT reer ns repo ERR OE 50 Figure 2 4 Power Modes On Suspend and OFF asar pato AE 51 Ligure 3 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Scree eaen er Oed Ga ae b RE bL E E rE TRES 74 Figure 3 2 Taskbar e o e la 76 Figure 353 Advanced Tb lilas TI Picune 3 3 ADOUt Pana ls 80 Ficus 355 About LA Panele odo e 81 Figure 3 5 Syste m ACCES DIN V c 6c iere tet efe t cd A Mae de NE 82 Figure 3 7 Administration For APOLO id iaa 82 Fisure 3 9 Viens Bat do ido 83 Bicure 320 LXEZ Paro Control Parla la 84 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Control Panel JBhetooiliso taa ra ricette b tr v pete ctt i id 85 Discover Bluctooth DEVICES Velilla ea 85 Bluetooth Devices Pane lke cara id diia 86 Blueto
89. 46 Scammer Control COM ip MEHR aa EEEa IO 147 Scanner Controly Barcode lira rri PH EU HUE rd UBER CRETAE ERE 148 Barcode Tab syiibolopey Sete io opaco 150 Symbology Strip Leadino MANE sereno pete a e HORT PRU EE ROTE E RE 152 Symbology Barcode Data Mateh LISt ciii rti eret tH E rrr PE OE rH ART 153 Symbology Prefix and Suffix CODO ius ict bison tfe ri Ed HE br piro EH CREER 155 Barcode Taby Ctr Char Mapping 15e ero tn ro HH CER EB FEE rH TO ERE 156 Barcode Tab Custom Identiflergu aecieenii uice reete rt d ERU a rt ER aran 158 Scanner Control Vibrationitabis aseo e e rot e raa reb reta rt treten 163 Summit Chent Utility SCU bemos tette ro ett ie e rH rt ede ra ttr rat 166 SOU Moai Taberno dunas 168 Main Fab Enter Admin PassWord ssrin tert tice rtr OUR ET 169 SOU PROMO Ib pt arro dart rn sites OX FOR ETHER NTR 170 Bt Ai gc Ld Mc ae ads ns oe ui LEM LL ENIMS Mt MU 171 SOU Stats M Eo a E E E AE 173 A LU Tem 174 SCU Global Ti etie be aie ete b e n PE ate xe ite Deep ctu ben tee rae tate 175 A erts edis fried ir edet buf e dud delest coU cibos duele E 180 CC Vole sto estillo dte co coitu caos 181 Configure a Summit Profile wath INO Security au iiie pee e EE Ere pur ee ee wx tne ese XP isis 182 Sumthib WEP E e oeni imm pei ig sie euh ip eto NE 183 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Table of Contents 13 Figure 5 13 Configure Summit Profile for LEAP w o WPA noticias cats 184 Eieute5 14 LEAP Credentials DIal g cule
90. 6 open COLOROW7 open LOE CLL LLL LLL ALE EVLA LEE LEO COLIROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 open COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open COL2ROWO VK F19 COL2ROW1 VK F20 COL2ROW2 KY PROGIS MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps 249 al COL2ROW3 VK_END COL2ROW4 open COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open LLEVA IAS RA ARONA LEELA LEE LEO COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open COL4ROWO SHIFT 1 COL4ROW1 SHIFT 4 COLAROW2 SHIFT 7 COL4ROW3 open COL4ROW4 KY PROG2S COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 open FLEECE LEAL ALE RE EER L OSLO UOT COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open COL6ROWO SHIFT 2 COL6ROW1 SHIFT 5 COL6ROW2 SHIFT 8 COL6ROW3 SHIFT 0 COL6ROWA4 KY PROG3S COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 open CLE kg OLE LE LT LE LL LEO LAE LET COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open COL8ROWO SHIFT 3 COL8ROW1 SHIFT 6 COL8ROW2 SHIFT 9 COL8ROW3 VK_SPACE COL8ROW4 open COL8ROW5 open COL8ROW6 open COL8ROW7 open E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 250 LLL LE LL LE IT OLEA EC LOLI VEL col CO CO CO CO CO CO L9IROWO open L9ROW1 open L9ROW2 open L9ROW3 o
91. APITAL LOROW5 open LOROW6 open LOROW7 open yop ur ELLE ALLEL EEL LEE L LEED L2ROWO VK F14 L2ROW1 VK F15 L2ROW2 KY PROGIB L2ROW3 VK RIGHT L2ROW4 open L2ROW5 open L2ROW6 open L2ROW7 open Ford gd VIM ER SE LEVEL OL LUO ERE RE EEE CE EL EEE EE OE EE ET L4ROWO VK_SLASH L4ROW1 open L4ROW2 open L4ROW3 VK_ESCAPE L4ROWA SHIFT 9 L4ROW5 open L4ROW6 open L4ROW7 SHIFT 6 ESTE qo ELLE LEL LLL LLM ELLE LEO COL6ROWO open CO CO CO CO CO CO CO L6ROW1 open L6ROW2 open L6ROW3 open L6ROWA SHIFT O0 L6ROW5 open L6ROW6 open L6ROW7 SHIFT VK_APOSTROPHE 247 al MXS Reference Guide 248 Creating Custom Key Maps al LLL ELL L OE LE LL OLENA ITEE COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open COL8ROWO open COL8ROW1 open COL8ROW2 open COL8ROW3 VK_HYPHEN COL8ROW4 open COL8ROW5 open COL8ROW6 open COL8ROW7 SHIFT VK_ EQUAL CELTAS ANA EVD OFLU OL COL9ROWO open COL9ROW1 open COL9ROW2 open COL9ROW3 open COL9ROW4 open COL9ROW5 open COL9ROW6 open COL9ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value 77 codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX8 32 key keypad 7 modified with SHIFT Map MAP MAP_SHIFT32 COLOROWO VK F18 COLOROW1 VK_F17 COLOROW2 VK_F16 COLOROW3 VK_HOME COLOROW4 open COLOROW5 open COLOROW
92. Address of keyboard hook AppLock found the kbdhook dll but was unable to get LOG_ERROR procedure failure the address of the initialization procedure For some reason the dll is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete applock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting applock exe in this manner triggers the AppLock system to reload Address of keyboard hook AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the LOG_EX procedure OK keyboard filter initialization procedure Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG_EX HotKey processing Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 222 Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete LOG_ERROR initialization Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock the LOG ERROR application could not be found or is corrupted Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed The backdoor hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device LOG PROCESSING Cannot find kbdhoo
93. CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter Perform a Warm Boot or Suspend Resume function to connect using the new profile configuration The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication See Also Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter if the username and password are left blank during setup E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 188 Summit Client Configuration al WPA LEAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility ok x Main Profile status Diags Global ca Default Bit Rate Open Radio Mode D Encryption EAP Type WPA TKIP tcm WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Figure 5 19 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP for WPA TKIP Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to WPA TKIP To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Username or Domain Username Password Figure 5 20 LEAP Credentials Enter the Username in the Credentials popup text entry box i
94. COMP understands Unrecognized scancode algorithm s The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEYCOMP understands Value outside of section A value defined as value data is only valid within a section defined as section A value line was found when a section header line was expected Sample Input File 77 general parms give the size of arrays all numeric values are decimal these numbers are validated with the data below Pi at compile time MAPNAME must be 8 digits all numerics MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps E EQ MX8RG A General MAPDESC Default MAPNAME 00000409 MAPCNT 13 MAPCOLS 5 MAPROWS 1 6 ALGOR NA 7 Not used for MX8 7 included in the MX8 map for compatibility ES with other compiler Special keys are accessed outside the map this specifies the row and column these should not need to change but Special EYSHIFT COL8ROWO 9ROWO EY2ND COI K KEYALT CO K KEYCONTRO L10ROWO L COL11ROWO the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for unmodified keys on the MX8 32 key keypad MAP MAP NORMAL32 COLOROWO VK F3 COLOROW1 VK F2 COLOROW2 VK F1 COLOROW3 VK DOWN COLOROW4 VK TAB COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 open COLOROW7 open LLLP v umor gy LLL LLL ATAN COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 open COLIROW2 ACTION SCAN1
95. Center Console The default Enabler adapter control setting are e Manage network settings enabled e Use Avalanche network profile enabled e Manage wireless settings disabled for Windows CE Units To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings 1 Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop 2 Select File Settings Enter the password 3 Select the Adapters tab 4 Choose settings for the Use Manual Settings parameter 5 Choose settings for Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings and Use Avalanche Network Profile 6 Tap the OK button to save the changes 7 Reboot the device Related Manual Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 128 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration al Enabler Configuration The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar Avalanche Icon or ES selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a navigation menu File View Help Avalanche Enabler 3 50 48 Copyright 2003 2006 Wavelink Corporation Agent not found Figure 3 39 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen File View Help Connect Updates Adapter Info Abort Programs About Settings Icons Scan Config List Exit Details Launchable All P
96. Certificate Services johndoe Certificate Issued The certificate you requested was issued to you gt DER encoded or Base 64 encoded Download certificate Download certificate chain Figure 5 41 User Certificate Issued Tap the Download certificate link E EQ MX8RG A MXS8 Reference Guide 202 Certificates P File Download Lx Some files can harm your computer If the file information below looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name certnew cer File type Security Certificate From 100 100 100 100 amp This type of file could harm your computer if it contains malicious code Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer Dpen Save Cancel More Info Iv tu Sash before opening this type onne Figure 5 42 Download Certificate Security Warning Tap Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the file name and location is required in later steps The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process Be sure to use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file For example if the private key was saved as MX8USER PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name for example MXSUSER CER MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 203 al Installing a User Certificate on the MX8 W
97. Certificate file and the Private Key file to the mobile device s persistent file location A persistent file location does not get erased when the mobile device performs a warm or cold boot For example the internal flash folder select My Device Storage Next place a copy of the User Certificate file and the Private Key file in the My Device System folder The certificate and key files should display in the Certificates and Authentication applet windows Note After the MX8 is reflashed with a new operating system the User Certificate and Private Key files must be re installed and re authenticated User Certificate To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start Settings Control Panel Certificates Set the drop down box to My Certificates as shown below The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates Stores L Trusted Authorities Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certif Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root Gr Remove Figure 1 23 Certificate Stores E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 28 Private Key
98. DL Carry case for MX8 with handle includes shoulder strap R MX8A411CASEHDL Holster for MX8 without handle or boot belt not included R MX8A420HOLSTERNHDL Holster for MX8 with handle without boot belt not included R MX8A421HOLSTERHDL E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 40 Getting Help Holster for MX8 with handle and boot belt not included R MX8A423HLSTRWHDLBOOT MX8 Padded handle with rubber overmold and two finger trigger R MX8A401HANDLE includes wrist strap Replacement MX8 Hand Strap R MX8A405HANDSTRAP Black rubber protective boot R MX8A402PROTBOOTBLK Yellow rubber protective boot R MX8A403PROTBOOTYEL Holster belt R 9200L67 MX8 Replacement Stylus fits MX8 carry cases 10 pack R MX8A501STYLUSPACK CD with CE 5 0 API s and LXE API s with documentation for custom R MX8ASOSCESOSDK application development Touch screen anti glare anti reflective protective film 10 pack R MX8A580PROTFILM MX8 Charge Comm Interface Cable USB Client for ActiveSync with R MX8A05IMULTICBLUSB power connector MX8 Charge Comm Interface Cable RS 232 Serial ActiveSync D9 R MX8A055MULTICBLDA9F Female with power connector MX8 RS 232 Serial Adapter cable 6in for use with printers that provide R MX8A058ADPTCBLPER their own source of power MX8 Headset coiled adapter cable includes quick disconnect headset R MX8A060ADPTCBLVOICE connector A headset
99. E IREH die 34 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications iuret teo a D e EH dee te d Doe EGER iis 35 Entering Da konnia 36 Using the Keypad i dod iris Ub de I RR NOH E as REN UNT Vie IE ances 36 Using the Input Panel or Virtual Keyboard inscio ene tteec ee n t deer e n idea ee EUH da 36 Using the Sty Us ui EE 37 Using the SCANNE uoo pe ra iti beu duse bi ec dila n Hd D PUE I ata 38 VocS Dala EEUU 38 Tethered CAOS cisco EIER RH HAE a ilatina 38 Eea 39 A sce Ha E SER a Ed iac e E I NE 39 ACCESSO c ecd noise a AE E A 39 CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT 43 Hardware Configuratio RAR o 43 System HardWare relatado adios acid 43 Central Processing LInit a eite oce eter Ert eet Cro DELHI E TED THE acacia erica 43 Co EOC eeaeee E A O E E E E E E EE 43 SY ATI rn 44 Internal Mint SD Memory Cold 44 Car REIS RE 44 Video SBS Stell sat A a 44 FOWE SUDI rana Pe 45 Mam rintisdigre cm 45 Backup Date Aaa 45 Wireless Cetina a os 45 S021 PE 45 COMP REL M EM IM M MM E 46 R35 232 Serial Por i deter HE OI te ie tb He MEO ep E ep Ht pea bbs 46 USB Client Polti o eb eO ria ee lo Oen be adeb ts 46 Audio Headset Connection 46 Audio Suppott ita 47 O 47 Voume Com nos ups 47 bon n T 47 Scanner Emdager Port sie RE HE HERR HR RR TR EH UE CHEER CR uaa T HR E HEEL A 47 Power t 48 Reboot SOQUONCES a
100. Figure 1 9 MX8 Desktop E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 12 Troubleshooting Quick Start Can t calibrate the touchscreen change the date time or adjust the volume AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device AppLock restricts User access to running programs Changes or modifications require Administrator access Refer to Chapter 6 AppLock for setup and processing information RFTerm opens and runs upon each cold boot and warm boot Tap File Exit to close the RFTerm application When installed RFTerm runs upon each cold boot and warm boot Suspend resume does not activate RFTerm if it was not running when Suspend mode initiated The MXS seems to lockup as soon as it is There may be small delays while the wireless client connects to the network authorization for Voxware enabled applications complete Wavelink Avalanche management of the MX8 startup completes and warm booted Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish Related Manuals for Startup Integrated Scanner Programming Guide contains programming barcodes used when setting up integrated scan engines e SE955 scanner barcode reading parameters refer to Chapter 2 in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide e Intermec EV 15 linear imager refer to Chapter 3 in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide e 5380SF 2D imager refer to Chapter 4 in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide MX8 User s Gu
101. IFT 1 COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 VK APOSTROPHE CELTAS IAEA VLE CELLU OL COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open TANIA ELE CEEOL EEL ELT OTL COL8ROWO VK RBRACKET COL8ROW1 VK COMMA COL8ROW2 SHIFT 4 COL8ROW3 VK BACK COL8ROW4 open COL8ROW5 open COL8ROW6 open COL8ROW7 VK_PERIOD LOE LPL Eo LEE EL EEL EEE OOD COL9ROWO open COL9ROW1 open COL9ROW2 open COL9ROW3 open COL9ROW4 open COL9ROW5 open COL9ROW6 open COL9ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter 7 the important part is the MAP value 7 codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX8 32 key keypad modified with BLUI Map MAP MAP BLUE32 COLOROWO VK F13 COLOROW1 VK_F12 COLOROW2 VK F11 EI MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps E EQ MX8RG A CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO Co CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO Ll1ROWO open L1ROW1 open L1ROW2 CHANGE MAP_ BRIGHT L1ROW3 open L1ROW4 open L1ROW5 open L1ROW6 open L1ROW7 open L3ROWO open L3ROW1 open L3ROW2 open L3ROW3 open L3ROW4 open L3ROW5 open L3ROW6 open L3ROW7 open L5ROWO open L5ROW1 open L5ROW2 open L5ROW3 open L5ROW4 open L5ROW5 open L5ROW6 open L5ROW7 open LOROW3 VK LEFT LOROWA4 VK C
102. K F6 VK PAI VK BACK VK F7 VK PAUSE VK BACKQUOTE VK F8 VK PERIOD VK_BACKSLASH VK F9 VK PLAY VK BROWSER BACK VK FINAL VK PRINT VK BROWSER FAVO VK HANGUL VK PRIOR VK BROWSER FORWARD VK HANJA VK RBRACKET VK BROWSER HOME VK HELP VK RBUTTON VK BROWSER REFR VK HOME VK RCONTROL VK BROWSER SEARCH VK HYPHEN VK RETURN VK BROWSER STOP VK INSERT VK RIGHT VK CANCEL VK JUNJA VK RMENU VK CAPITAL VK KAN VK RSHIFT VK CLEAR VK KANJI VK RWIN VK COMMA VK LAUNCH APP1 VK SCROLL VK CONTROL VK LAUNCH APP2 VK SELECT VK CONVERT VK LAUNCH MAIL VK SEMICOLON VK CRSEL VK LAUNCH MEDIA SELE VK SEPARATOR VK DECIMAL VK LBRACKET VK SHIFT VK DELETE VK LBUTTON VK SLASH VK DIVIDE VK LCONTROL VK SLEEP VK DOWN VK LEFT VK SNAPSHOT VK END VK LMENU VK SPACE VK EQUAL VK LSHIFT VK SUBTRACT VK EREOF VK LWIN VK TAB VK ESCAPE VK MBUTTON VK UP VK EXECUTE VK MEDIA NEXT TRACK VK VOLUME DOWN VK EXSEL VK MEDIA PLAY PAUSE VK VOLUME MUTE VK F1 VK MEDIA PREV TRACK VK VOLUME UP VK F10 VK MEDIA STOP VK ZOOM VK F11 VK MENU VK F12 VK MULTIPLY VK F13 VK NEXT VK F14 VK NOCONVERT VK F15 VK NONAME VK Fl6 VK NUMLOCK VK F17 VK NUMPADO VK F18 VK NUMPAD1 VK F19 VK NUMPAD2 VK F2 VK NUMPAD3 VK F20 VK NUMPAD4 VK F21 VK NUMPAD5 VK F22 VK NUMPAD6 VK F23 VK NUMPAD7 VK F24 VK NUMPAD8 E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 258 Appendix B Technical Specifications al ASCII Control Codes The following table lists ASCH Control
103. LS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store For EAP TLS also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store 4 Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked 5 The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate 6 For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button 7 Tap the OK button then the Commit button 8 When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed 9 Enter the Username and Password Tap the OK button LoS Credentials Figure 5 9 Sign On Screen Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is properly configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used The sign on screen is displayed after a reboot for each of the listed protocols Note Complete details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter If a user enters invalid credentials and taps OK the device associates but does not authenticate The user is again prompted to enter credentials If the user taps the Cancel button the device does not associate The user is not prompted ag
104. MAC 00 17 23 01 80 15 through Jun 2007 Scanner GW 172 16 47 254 OAL version SE955 decoded scanner from Symbol Display LQ0284AC212 Flash Memory Intel Strata Flash R bottom boot 8011 1101062000D902 128MB 512 blks of 256K DRAM Memory 128MB Avail 85112K 36 free ion Figure 3 4 About Panels User application version information can be shown in the Version window Version window information is retrieved from the registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor see section titled Utilities LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Version in the registry Create a new string value under this key The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 81 al About LXE Access A Settings Control Panel About LXE Displays hardware and software details Tab Title Contents Software GUID Windows CE Version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version Language Language indicates any pre installed Asian fonts Hardware CPU Type Codec Type Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions LXE
105. MX8 Reference Guide Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 Equipped LXE Copyright O 2007 by LXE Inc All Rights Reserved E EQ MX8RG A Notices LXE Inc reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this document at any time without notice While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document or from the use of the information contained herein Further LXE Incorporated reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes Copyright This document is copyrighted All rights are reserved This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from LXE Inc Copyright O 2007 by LXE Inc An EMS Technologies Company 125 Technology Parkway Norcross GA 30092 U S A 770 447 4224 Trademarks LXE and Spire are registered trademarks of LXE Inc RFTerm is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies Norcross GA Microsoft ActiveSync MSN Outlook Windows the Windows logo and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Summit D
106. MX8 resets the Time Zone to the factory default values GMT 05 00 Eastern Time To set the Time Zone tap the Dd Settings Control Panel Date Time icon Select the physical time zone Enable the checkbox next to Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving if applicable If required adjust the time and calendar date and tap Apply Tap OK when you are finished or X to ignore any changes Enter Owner Information Optional Use the virtual keyboard or keys on the keypad to enter the following data To set Owner information tap the a Settings Control Panel Owner icon Select the Identification tab and enter Name Company Address and telephone numbers Enable the Display owner identification checkbox if you want this information displayed each time the system powers on Select the Notes tab enter a note to see at power on Enable the display owner notes checkbox to see the note at power on Select the Network ID tab and enter the User Name Password and Domain Tap OK when finished or X to ignore any changes Set the Display Backlight Timer Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this manual for information relating to the power states of the MX8 Select 27 Settings Control Panel Display Backlight tab Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes The first option affects the MX8 when it is running on battery power only The second option affects the MX8 when it
107. OW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys modified with ORANG on the MX8 32 key keypad EX Map MA P MAP_ORANGE32 COLOROWO VK F8 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO LOROW1 VK F7 LOROW2 VK F6 LOROW3 VK NEXT LOROW4 SHIFT VK_TAB LOROW5 open LOROW6 open LOROW7 open SLEEP Wd LAE REVELL OCT OU EOEL COL1ROWO open L1ROW1 open L1ROW2 CHANGE MAP_VOLUM L1ROW3 open L1ROW4 open L1ROW5 open L1ROW6 open L1ROW7 open CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO EE L2ROWO VK F9 L2ROW1 VK_F10 L2ROW2 SHIFT 8 L2ROW3 VK PRIOR L2ROW4 open L2ROW5 open L2ROW6 open L2ROW7 open Fg dur og CEEI LLL LL LEO LOL LEO col CO CO CO CO CO CO CO col CO CO CO CO CO CO CO L3ROW1 open L3ROW2 open L3ROW3 open L3ROW4 open L3ROW5 open L3ROW6 open L3ROW7 open L3ROWO open LAROWO VK BACKSLASH L4ROW1 SHIFT 3 L4ROW2 SHIFT VK_HYPHEN L4ROW3 SHIFT VK_BACKSLASH L4ROW4 VK_EQUAL L4ROW5 open L4ROW6 open L4ROW7 VK_INSERT 245 al MXS Reference Guide 246 Creating Custom Key Maps al LLE ELV OL LE LE LTE OLEA ATINA COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open COL6ROWO VK LBRACKET COL6ROW1 SHIFT 2 COL6ROW2 SHIFT VK SLASH COLOROW3 SHIFT VK_SEMICOLON COL6ROW4 SH
108. Output Figure 5 7 SCU Diags Tab Buttons Button Function Re connect Tap this button to apply or reapply the current config profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN Activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output text box on the lower part of the panel Release Renew Release the current IP address to obtain a new IP address This option renews the IP address when applicable Activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output text box If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the wireless device this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box Note that the current IP address is displayed Start Ping Tap the text box and type an IP address to Ping Tap the Start Ping button to start pinging the IP address The button name changes to Stop Ping Tap Stop Ping to end the pinging process The pinging process ends when any other button on this panel is tapped or a different menu tab is selected Ping results are displayed in the Diagnostic Output text box Diagnostics Tapping this button begins an attempt to re connect to the wireless LAN This option provides more data in the Diagnostics Output text box than the Re connect option The data dump includes client state profile settings global settings and a list of access points by SSID broadcasting in the wireless device s immediate area The text file created sdc diag is placed in the Windows folder It is overwritten when Diagnostics is run
109. P type None Encryption None Summit Client Utility ok x Main Profie status Diags cba Profe Pefaut es New Rename Delete Scan Radio Client Name mower El Encryption EAP Type None y None WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Figure 5 4 SCU ProfileTab When logged in as an Admin see Admin Login use the Profile tab to manage profiles When not logged in as an Admin the parameters can be viewed and cannot be changed The buttons on this tab are dimmed if the user is not logged in as Admin Buttons Button Function Commit Saves the profile settings made on this screen Settings are saved in the profile Credentials Allows entry of a username and password certificate names and other information required to authenticate with the access point The information required depends on the EAP type Delete Deletes the profile The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted New Creates a new profile with the default settings see Profile Parameters and prompts for a unique name If the name is not unique an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created Rename Assigns a new unique name If the new name is not unique an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 171 Button Function Scan Opens a window th
110. PA TLS Only Copy the certificate and private key files to the mobile device Import the certificate by navigating to Start Control Panel Certificates Certificates Select My Certificates from the pull down list Certificates OK E Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 3 Public Primi Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root Gv Remove Figure 5 43 My Certificates Stores Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key OK lx O From a Smart Card Reader T Card Absent Figure 5 44 Import User Certificate Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 204 Certificates al Sele DM R OK X a system sa rfengca cer Name Type certificates v SU O ceniti e Kk 2 21 Pm A s Figure 5 45 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location on the mobile device where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK Tap Yes to import the certificate The certificate is now shown in the list Highlight the certificate you just imported and tap the View button From the Field pull down menu select Private Key e Ifthe private key is present the process is complete e Ifthe private key is not present import the private key To import the private key tap OK to return to the Certificates screen MX8 Reference Guid
111. Power Scheme Defaults listed above e The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity e The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15sec 3sec e And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity Power Properties LOK 2 Power Properties LOK E Power Properties joki x Battery schemes Device Status Battery Schemes Device Status Battery schemes Device Status Power Power Scheme Charging Backup battery E Device Name Power Level 3 Good ER C Power BKL1 High DO dl o NDSO High DO E Low Low pxa27x lcd High DO Very Very WAV1 High DO Main batteries Switch state to User Idle Remaining power 100 Never v Voltage 4 176 V p Boriain banoie Switch state to System Idle Remaining power 100 after 5 seconds y Voltage 2 758 V Switch state to Suspend after 15 minutes y Figure 3 32 Power Properties Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Changes are saved across tabs Tap the X box to discard any changes Tap the for Help The changes take effect immediately E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 108 Settings Control Panel Options al Regional Settings Access A Settings Control Panel Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and langua
112. Status tab screen if desired See Status Panel Tap OK 0 Press the Switch Key sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application s QN tA oon The device is now in end user mode Note LXE has made the assumption in this appendix that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator Note AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Setup a New Device 209 pal Application Panel Application Launch Opt a End User Switchpad Application Launch Panel Pi Administrator Control fra OK Es Security Panel Status Panel Figure 6 1 AppLock Panels E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 210 Administration Mode Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the device and configuration options The administrator must enter a valid password when a password has already been assigned before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed The administrator can configure the following options Create change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access Create change the password for administrator access Assign the name of the application or applications to lock Select the command line of the application or applications to lock In addition to the
113. Switching to user mode Explanation and or corrective action The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch to user mode Error Messages Level LOG_PROCESSING Switching to user hotkey press The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator LOG_PROCESSING Taskbar hook failure AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from re enabling it LOG_ERROR Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar LOG EX Timeout looking for app window After the application is launched AppLock must wait until the application has initialized itself before proceeding The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out LOG ERROR ToUser after admin not at boot The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press LOG EX ToUser after admin app still open The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration LOG EX ToUser after admin no app or cmd line change If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press the administrator may have left the configured application open If so AppLock doe
114. Utilities LXE Drivers LXE Image LXE API Internet Explorer and NET Framework Version Software Hardware CPU T ype LXEZPAIRING BTDRGCESO1D Intel Xscale PXA270 revCS 520MHz 414C5845 CDEF 0801 1E11 01062000D902 RF Term RFTRMPXSiRm Windows CE version Codec Type WM9705 rev 4 4 LXE CF Radio Driver SGCFPCES 14d Windows CE 5 0 build 0 patched through Scanner Internal Symbol NET Compact Framework v2 0 SP2 Jun 2007 Disple Internet Explorer OAL version MX8 MX8500217 PXA27x 10 11 2007 12 00 isplay Active Color x 240 Y 320 virtual X 240 Y 320 bright 100 LXE Utilities MX8GCS001A SITO7 LXE Drivers MX8GCS001A SITO Flash memory LXE Image MX8GC5001A SITO Bootloader version Intel Strata Flash R bottom boot 8011E MX8500120 PXA27x 10 11 2007 12 00 1101062000D902 131072 KB 512 blks of 1024K 32 bit Compile version DRAM memory pee oido Oct 5 2007 83 MB avail 85 112K 49 free Figure 3 5 About LXE Panels User application version information can be shown in the Version window Version window information is retrieved from the registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor see section titled Utilities LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Version in the
115. X8 Reference Guide 60 Power Supply Power Supply The MX8 computer is designed to work with a Lithium Ion Li Ion battery from LXE Under normal conditions a fully charged battery should last approximately eight to ten hours before requiring a recharge The more you use the scanner or the wireless transmitter the shorter the time required between battery recharges A suspended MX8 maintains data and time for a minimum of 2 days using a main battery that has a reached the Low Warning point and a fully charged backup battery The MX8 retains data during a main battery hot swap for at least 5 minutes Note New main battery packs must be charged prior to use This process takes up to five hours in an MX8 Multi Charger and five hours when the MX8 is connected to external power Checking Battery Status Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel Battery tab Battery level power status and charge remaining is displayed MX8 Status LED and the Batteries The Status LED is located next to the F2 button When the LED is The Statusis Comment Blinking Red Power Fail Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Or Connect the MX8 to external AC power Steady Red Main Battery Low Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Or Connect the MX8 to external AC power No Color Good No user intervention required Important When the backup battery power is Low av Sett
116. X8 and some of its optional features Note LXE recommends frequently charging the MX8 using an external power source to ensure continuous charging of the backup battery Windows CE 5 0 i For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE AA 50users guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the MXS8 This chapter s contents assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows XP or 2000 desktop computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the MX8 and its Windows CE environment E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 66 Installed Software Installed Software Note Some standard Windows options require an external modem connection Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE When you order an MX8 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and wireless client communication The files are loaded by LXE and stored in folders in the mobile device This section lists the contents of the folders and the general function of the files Files installed in each MX are specific to the intended function of the MX Files installed in LXE mobile devices that are configured for a wireless environment usually contain a radio specific driver the driver for the radio is specific to the manufacturer of the radio ins
117. a 104 PASS Word E 105 A A A ER ER etse too sei A ceo heus E e sui vaste 106 Power Properes o ee red tato ei e risp UR FR ie FLUR ELA EU dB Dm DP Beem bec LEE 107 R s onal Selilips aaa LM 108 STRUM Double rio a etactioees ss 110 Stylus gt Calibrate ses 26i E OS REUS TER LABS REUTERS iia 110 System Properties Ub a ER IEEE UR RESTE EDS mascara ata 111 Volume SOUDSs irse EEEa 112 ActiveSync Connection Settings on Windows PC eere inest tree 117 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen neo io US TR HEROS REV REEF FRED ERU 128 Avalanche Enabler Connection Options raise otis a ina ERR AREE e bUh 131 Avalanche Enabler Execution Options Dimmed meva ron eterne ere re reir hee etis 132 Avalanche Enabler Server Contact Opt cuisine imt he s inicias 133 Avalanche Enabler Startup Shutdown Options 5 nee e reines ci 134 Avalanche Enabler Scan Config Opinan ct ai eid is ene iE ERE ird 135 Avalanche Enabler Window Display Options nite cen ie reir ere tette eere dh 135 Avalanche Enabler Application Shortcuts visas m ei cis EHE IRE RET EUH 136 Avalanche Enabler Adapters Options Network serca ia 137 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed iuc pesce apo ratita parese 138 Manual Settings Properties Pauels pn dieses heves e peo YE aE AER UR aE ENARE 139 stat s DIC dM 139 SD Card Looatlgfiennicsc ia iria 141 MXS Image Updater oie 142 Scanner Conttol Panel sc a 145 SCANNED Cont NISI id 1
118. a key sequence that the application being locked does not use The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with lt Shift gt lt Alt gt and lt Ctrl gt text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the lt Ctrl gt key is pressed followed by lt A gt Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey 1s pressed to switch user modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP Setting a Password in the Security Panel Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match Passwords are case sensitive When the user exits the Administra
119. a secet e A DUREE LEER 110 A SD UC DL tm TM 110 RN 111 A desuper uui MM E DE ERIT dd oue DE 111 Menor y sas sate no nce E seus sane E oe soa ety saenan AS 112 Device Name dioe cT 112 A ue Chee eerte ees tira ce bM Ec ep tees a Sr XR Le Hou E 112 Volume and SOUS acces EHE DURER E Leer EAM Re REN Eom Lu exon utu baci E EN 112 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs scort Ran tht nnn no ES RRE ERRANTE 113 Access Files on Flash Cards 4 iate imei avt e iei ade Wired to idv E idad 113 Activesynes Get Connected PEOGGSS in 114 Introduction pi e db HR du d n ees 114 Mantra Instalan TT m mm 115 Install ActiveSync om Desktop Laplace ars 115 Serial Connect ose t a nnde uda ud o bu d dd ted dvi idu 105 USB Connge tOn 4 vc acid 115 Connect lt Initial Install Process ete tet rd YER AU HE HERE IRE GS ECRIRE TIRE 116 Change Connection Parameters uen oe en een e e e a a uber eae Een d PI E IUS 116 Backup MX Elles iR n a p De dle ap ER d don Ue prete deme fuis 117 Prerequisttes ua R MEER EAE e Uv Mace HR HERE ARO ai 117 MXS and PC Partin ers itp iis cere tiet i ERE R E E REA 117 Setia Port ICA eee E EE E E E 117 USE Icaria 117 Radio RENTA pan 117 COME 118 sq si 118 DISCO UI E TOT D OLD STIS uc 118 Serial OMS CU ON ae 118 USB CONNECTION a ad 118 Radio Conecto sosa Noni RES Eri 118 Cold Boota d L ass al Host ResConm ecto tics iaa 119 Activesyae Troubleshooting coseno naaa adi s 119 AN 121 ISTUD EIS
120. able to encrypt password LOG ERROR MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Error Messages 223 al Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Encrypt acquire encrypt context Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR failure Encrypt acquired encrypt context Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX OK Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX Encrypt export key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt export key length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt exported key OK Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt failure The password encryption failed LOG ERROR Encrypt gen key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt generate key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt get user key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt hash data failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt out of memory for key Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypted data OK The password has been successfully encrypted LOG EX Enter AppLockEnumWi
121. ach individual application and is available to the user for all configured applications Clear Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application Button information The Global settings are not cleared Scroll Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to Buttons application setup screen The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Multi Application Configuration 215 al Launch Button When clicked displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration panel Application Launch Opt ok x Figure 6 4 Application Launch Options Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential Auto At Boot Default is Enabled Auto At Boot when enabled automatically launches subject to the specified Delay in seconds the application after the unit is rebooted If a Delay in seconds is specified AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application The Delay default value is 10 seconds valid values are between 0 no delay and a maximum of 999 seconds Auto At Boot Retries is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure occurs when the application is automatically launch
122. ackages Time on Taskbar Device Status File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Mobile Device Server The connection methods by default are wireless and COM connections Any updates available will be applied to the mobile device immediately upon a successful connection Abort Stop transmission MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 129 al Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings The Enabler control panel is by default password protected The default password is system The password is not case sensitive Scan Config Note LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE devices The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that can be created using the Avalanche Management Console utilities Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details Exit The Exit option is password protected The default password is leave The password is not case sensitive If changes were made on the Startup Shutdown tab screen then after entering the password tap OK and the following screen is displayed Avalanche Monitor Do you want to ec O Stop monitoring Change the option
123. adapter MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Setup 17 3 To AC wall outlet Plug the 2 prong cable into any AC wall outlet with a dependable power source AC power is now being supplied to the AC power adapter and the cradle aro Figure 1 15 Connect Power Cable to the Cradle Input 100 240V 50 60 Hx 0 5A Output 5V 3A Indoor dry location use only Connecting the Multipurpose USB Power Cable Figure 1 16 Connect the USB Power Cable to the MX8 Port Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX8 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before connecting to USB Connector B Firmly push the power cable connector pin into connector B Plug the 2 prong cable into an AC wall outlet Connector C Insert the USB Type A plug into an appropriate USB port on a desktop laptop computer for ActiveSync communication E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 18 Hardware Setup Connecting the Multipurpose RS 232 Power Cable Figure 1 17 Connect the RS 232 Power Cable to the MX8 Port Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX8 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before connecting the B or C
124. again Not available in all releases Tap the Save To button to save the Diagnostics log to a TXT file in the My Device folder the default folder MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration Global Tab 175 The parameters on this panel can only be changed when an Admin is logged in with a password The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password Note Summit Client Utility Main Profile Status Diags Global Roam Trigger fox x Value SDC ia BG Channel Set Aggressive Scan CCX features MM Save Changes Custom Parameter Option Changing this setting will require a power cycle Commit Tap the Commit button to save changes If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Factory Default Settings RX Diversity On Start on Main TX Diversity On Roam Trigger 65 dBm Roam Delta 10 dBm Roam Period 10 sec BG Channel Set Full Aggressive Scan On Frag Threshold 2346 RTS Threshold 2347 Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout 5000 Ping Delay ms 1000 LED Off Hide Passwords Off Auth Timeout 8 seconds Admin Password SUMMIT or blank Certs Path System CCX Off WMM Off Tray Icon On Figure 5 8 SCU Global Tab LXE does not support the parameter Custom option The parameter valu
125. ain for credentials until the device is rebooted the radio is disabled then enabled the Reconnect button on the Diags tag is tapped or the profile is modified and the Commit button is tapped MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 181 al Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path Note lt is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail User Certificates EAP TLS authentication requires a user certificate The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store To generate the user certificate follow the instructions in Generating a User Certificate for the Mobile Device later in this chapter Import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store by following the instructions in Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device later in this chapter A Root CA certificate is also needed for EAP TLS Refer to the section below Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS Two options are offered for storing these certificates They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory How To Use Windows Certificate Store 1 Follow the instructions later in this chapter for Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC 2 To import the certificate into the Windows store
126. ain in The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the LOG_EX user mode maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded Read registry error hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_ERROR not considered an error The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the registry Read registry failure app name AppName registry value does not exist or is empty LOG_ERROR This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode Read registry failure Cmd Line AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty LOG_ERROR This is not considered an error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application Read registry failure Internet The Internet registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_ERROR not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application Registering Backdoor MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization LOG_PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization LOG_PROCESSING MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Error Messages Message Registry read failure at reenter user mode Explanation and or corrective
127. aker is located on the front of the MX8 above the MX8 logo The mobile device emits a Sound Pressure Level loudness of at least 102 dB measured as follows e Frequency 2650 100 Hz e Distance 10 cm on axis in front of Speaker opening in front of unit e Duration Continuous 2650 Hz tone The default is 1 beep for a good scan and 2 beeps for a bad scan Volume Control Volume control is managed by Windows CE control panel applet an API and the Orange Scan up down arrow key key sequence Volume control is covered in greater detail later in this guide Voice All Microsoft supplied audio codecs are included in the OS image The hardware codecs the input and output analog voice circuitry and the system design are designed to support voice applications using a headset connected to the Adapter Audio accessory cable and the bottom end connector Scanner Imager Port The MX8 has one integrated barcode scanner port There is one internal scanner engine and two internal imagers are available Only one scan engine is installed at a time Scan engines are not hot swappable The scan engine options are e EV 15 linear imager from Intermec e SE 955 high performance scanner from Symbol e 5380SF 2D image undecoded scanner from Hand Held Products The internal scanner activates when the scan button on the front of the MX8 is depressed or when the trigger on an installed trigger handle is depressed A Scanner utility is available to set sc
128. allation of AppLock e g missing DLLs e Corrupted registry settings To summarize if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered AppLock Password Troubleshooting Can t locate the password that has been set by the administrator Enter this LXE back door key sequence Ctrl L Ctrl X Ctrl E E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 212 End User Switching Technique P End User Switching Technique Note The touch screen must be enabled Refer to Start Settings Control Panel Handheld Misc Touch Panel Disabled setting Keyboard v RFTerm Word a Figure 6 2 Switchpad Menu A checkmark indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user When Keyboard is selected the MX8 default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is activated Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end user mode a Switchpad icon it looks like three tiny windows one above the other is displayed in the taskbar The taskbar is always visible on top of the application in focus Note If only one application is configured and the Input Panel is not enabled the Switchpad icon is not displayed When the user taps the Switchpad icon a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected applicatio
129. ame IP address and MAC address e The name IP address and MAC address of the Access Point maintaining the connection to the network Channel currently being used for wireless traffic e Beacon period The time between AP beacons in kilomicroseconds 1 kilomicrosecond 1 024 microseconds e DTIM interval A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message DTIM The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them For example if DTIM 3 then every third beacon contains a DTIM e Current transmit power in mW e Rate in Mbps e Signal strength RSSI and signal quality changes with network activity Signal quality is a measure of the clarity of the signal and is displayed as a percentage Note After completing radio configuration it is good practice to review this screen to verify the radio has associated no encryption WEP or authenticated LEAP any WPA as indicated above E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 174 Summit Client Configuration al Diags Tab The Diags panel can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and wireless connectivity issues for the IP address shown Admin login is required for the Re connect button function ao 7 lox x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default IP Address 172 16 38 209 Re connect Release Renew SDC Start Ping Diagnostics Save To Diaanostics
130. an engine power management options Functionality of the internal scanner driver is based on the driver version installed in the MX8 Functions may include failed scan LED indication of a scan in progress among other functions Configuring specific barcode parameters for any of the scan or imager engines is performed by using the MX8 scanner to scan setup barcodes located in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 48 Power Key Power Key Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes for information relating to the power states of the MX8 The power key is located next to the Diamond 2 gt key on the 32 key keypad When a main battery pack is inserted in the MX8 for the first time the Power key must be pressed Reboot Sequences When the Windows CE desktop 1s displayed or an application begins the power up or reboot sequence is complete If you have previously saved your settings they will be restored on warm boot and cold boot Application panel changes are saved when OK is tapped on an application properties panel Suspend Resume Warm Boot Cold Boot Quickly tapping the Power key places the MX8 in Suspend mode Quickly tapping the Power key again pressing any key pressing the trigger on the trigger handle or tapping the touchscreen returns the MX8 from Suspend The System LED blinks green when the video display is Off Temporary data not saved is lost All previous user
131. an be accessed by tapping Start Programs RFTerm Please refer to Terminal Emulation Setup earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction Refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction WAV files added by the user should be stored in System LXE RFTerm Sounds Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Option The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Wavelink Avalanche Manager After configuration Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset Network parameter configuration is supported for IP address DHCP or static IP RF network SSID DNS hosts primary secondary tertiary Subnet mask Enabler update The MXS has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Following this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE MX8 See Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Con
132. and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Notes e Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete and is not affected by any stripping settings e Ifthe stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode a good beep will still emit since barcode data was read from the scanner E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 154 Barcode Tab al Match List Rules The data in the match list is processed by the rules listed below e Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list If the list contains ABC and AB in that order incoming data with ABC will match first and the AB will have no effect e When a match between the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is found that string is stripped from the barcode data e Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached e Ifthe wildcard is not specified the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the barcode data The string ABC strips off the prefix ABC The string X YZ will strip off the suffix XYZ The string ABC XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix
133. anent part of the mobile device and the REG file is no longer needed unless it is necessary to perform a cold boot as cold booting returns the registry to factory defaults and it will be necessary to double tap the REG file again Once the keymap has been added to the registry it should appear in the Keyboard control panel as the name given in the MAPNAME field in the key file To activate the keymap select the keymap from the popup menu and close the control panel with the OK button To return to the default keymap select Default from the keymap popup and tap OK The compiler has three functional stages e First the input file is read and parsed for any syntax errors The data read is stored in internal tables e Second the data parsed from the input file is validated to see that all of the items required by the keyboard driver for normal operation are present e Third and finally the KEYCOMP REG file is written out in the format required by the REGLOAD utility on the Windows CE device MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps 237 Keymap Source Format The source file DEFAULT KEY is supplied with the keymap compiler This is the commented source for the default keymap Default The comments in this file should make the majority of this document redundant There is a copy of this file at the end of this section in Sample Input File This section should be read while referring to this sample source for simpl
134. anners and printers do not need to be deleted before a different scanner or printer can be paired with the MX8 e The Bluetooth device should be as close as possible line of sight to the mobile device during the pairing process See Also Bluetooth in Chapter 1 Introduction and Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 85 al Discover Figure 3 10 Control Panel Bluetooth Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in the vicinity The Discovery process also queries for the unique identifier for each device discovered Figure 3 11 Discover Bluetooth Devices Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions Devices not paired are not shown after a Suspend Resume function E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 86 Settings Control Panel Options Bluetooth Devices A device previously discovered and paired with the MX8 is shown in the Bluetooth Devices panel Bluetooth Devices Settings About Ie Name Last 4 T SF51 Scanner 00 32 4F SATO MOBILE PR 95 81 ES GOM4301XP CC 0B at Discover Figure 3 12 Bluetooth Devices Panel Note When an active paired device not the MX8 enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the MX8 Bluetooth scanning range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the MX8 is lost There may b
135. ap the keyboard icon at the bottom of the screen to put the virtual keyboard on the display Using the stylus e Tap the Shift key to type one capital letter e Tap the CAPS key to type all capital letters e Tap the au key to access symbols Input Panel esc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 jab a wje r t vjuji o p E ICAP a s d f U h j JK T 7 shift z x c v b njm CET AT ES Figure 1 28 Input Panel Virtual Keyboard Some applications do not automatically display the Input Panel In this case do the following to use the Input Panel 1 Tap the Input Panel Virtual Keyboard icon in the taskbar 2 Select Keyboard from the menu 3 Tap the data entry area on the display when you want to enter data using the Input Panel MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Entering Data 37 Using the Stylus Note This section is directed to the MX8 daily user The assumption is that the mobile device has been configured and the touch panel calibrated by the System Administrator prior to releasing the MX8 for daily use The touchscreen should be calibrated before initial use The stylus performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a desktop computer The stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse single tap or double tap to select menu options drag the stylus across text to select hold the stylus down to activate slider bars etcetera Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or penci
136. application being controlled LOG PROCESSING Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being LOG EX calculated Hook wndproc failure AppLock is unable to lock the application This could LOG_ERROR happen if the application being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock Hook wndproc of open app failure The application is open but AppLock cannot lock it LOG ERROR Hot key event creation failure The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey LOG ERROR notification Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Hot key set event failure When the administrator changes the hotkey LOG ERROR configuration the hotkey controller must be notified This notification failed Hotkey press message received The user just pressed the configured hotkey LOG PROCESSING In app hook WM SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it LOG EX In app hook WM WINDOWPOSCHANG ED In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s
137. ar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin backdoor The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the administrator LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin hotkey press The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin kbdhook dll not found The keyboard hook load failed so AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin keyboard hook initialization failure If the keyboard hook initialization fails AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin registry read failure See the explanation of the Registry read failure above AppLock is switching into Admin mode If a password has been configured the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered LOG PROCESSING Switching to TaskbarScreenMode In administration mode the taskbar is visible and enabled LOG EX E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 228 Message
138. aracter from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore drop in the Replacement edit control Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down box typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control according to the formats defined above and then selecting Assign The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button For example if Carriage Return is replaced by Line Feed by specifying J or 0x0A in the configuration the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode or defined in the prefix or suffix will be replaced with the value 0x0a The Wedge then sends Ctrl J to the receiving application rather than Ctrl M List Box The list box shows all user defined control characters and their assigned replacements All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted When an entry or entries is highlighted and Delete is selected the highlighted material is deleted from the list box E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 158 Barcode Tab P Barcode Custom Identifiers Code IDs can be defined by the user This allows processing parameters to b
139. are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms Ping Delay ms 1000 The amount of time in milliseconds between each ping after a Start Ping button tap Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 177 Parameter Default Function LED Off The LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device Options are On Off Hide Password Off If On the Summit Config Utility masks passwords characters on the screen are displayed as an as they are typed and when they are viewed When Off password characters are not masked Options are On Off Admin Password SUMMIT Or blank A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped If Hide Password is On the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry dialog box The password is case sensitive This value is masked when the Admin is logged out Options are none Certs Path System A valid directory path of up to 64 characters where WPA Certificate Authority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device LXE suggests ensuring the Windows folder path currently exists before assigning the path in this parameter See sections titled Root Certificates and User Certificates later in this chapter for instructions on obtainin
140. at lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs Tap the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs Each AP s SSID its received signal strength indication RSSI and whether or not data encryption is in use true or false Sort the list by tapping on the column headers If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID the list displays the AP with the strongest RSSI and the least security Connect Refresh Figure 5 5 SCU Scan If you are logged in as an Admin tap an SSID in the list and tap the Connect button you return to the Profile window to recreate a profile for that SSID with the profile name being the same as the SSID or the SSID with a suffix such as 1 ifa profile with the SSID as its name exists already WEP Keys PSK Keys Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption Note Unsaved Changes The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from this tab Important The settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen Please refer to Wireless Security later in this Summit Client Utility section to determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN Profile Parameters Parameter Default Explanation Edit Profile Default A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters establishes th
141. ata Up to 19 characters can be included in the string The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding Please see the Hat Encoding section in Appendix B for a list of characters with their hex and hat encoded values Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values Add Prefix To enable a prefix check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When barcode data is processed the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the prefix The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If AI is selected the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Add Suffix To enable a suffix check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When barcode data is processed the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the barcode data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the suffix The suffix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If Al is selected the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been s
142. ata Communications Inc Summit Data Communications the Summit logo and The Pinnacle of Performance are trademarks of Summit Data Communications Inc Java and Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S or other countries and are used under license The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by LXE Inc is under license Hand Held is a registered trademark of Hand Held Products Inc located in Skaneateles Falls NY Wavelink the Wavelink logo and tagline Wavelink Studio Avalanche Management Console Mobile Manager Avalanche Mobility Center Avalanche MC and Mobile Manager Enterprise are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation Kirkland RAMO and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc 1205 S Orr Street Seattle WA 98108 All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations When this manual is in PDF format Acrobat Reader Copyright O 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated applies Important This symbol is placed on the product to remind users to dispose of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE appropriately per Directive 2002 96 EC In most areas this p
143. ate for programs or storage 112 Memory installed sss 111 Memory system parameter seen 111 Menu Options Stati acest ia 71 Microphone adjustment cccesceesseeseeeseeeeeeeeees 19 Microsoft File Viewers and password protected files e 71 MiniSD Card A ode eae fettve 50 Mixer record gain cooocconccconocononocnnnnonncnnnnnnnncrononccnnons 101 Mode D EE 52 OM to c 51 Suspend ream tas poe a c nU 52 Mode Key Functions oocccoccccconncnononncccnncrnnarananinnon 58 Modes ADDLOCI nieder o beds 210 MXS8 Multi Charger described sse 63 My Certificates coin tei erre tenta 27 My Device ph Me 70 N Network driver properties eesssssss 103 Network Profile Avalanche eie onion ce 138 139 No Security SUM EAS 182 O Ott ModE iarsan 52 ON Mode characteristics sess 51 Operating Temperature MXS ou oni MADE 255 US AC to DG usines ti 255 Optional SOWANG x24 saca ue HU OU Re eS 68 Optional Software higl oinm e 68 WaveLink Avalanche Enabler 68 E EQ MX8RG A Index Orange and Blue keyS ooooooncnnnocnnnccnoccconincnonnnnnnonos 57 Owner Identification eee 104 Network ID and password 104 M M 104 Owner information eese 22 P O CE 143 Password 105 APPL OOK Sy
144. ate store or in the directory with the path specified as the value for Certs Path on the Summit Client Utility SCU Global tab When you don t specify a Certs Path value SCU uses the path to this directory for the Certs Path value When you enter a CA certificate name on a SCU Credentials page you enter only the filename and extension not the path The Certs Path global setting provides the path If you import CA certificates into the Microsoft certificate store and want to use them in the SCU select Use MS store on the Credentials page When using the Microsoft certificate store SCU ignores the Certs Path global setting and the value specified in the CA Cert filename field on the Credentials window User not CA certificates for EAP TLS must be selected from the Microsoft certificate store When you use EAP FAST you must create a PAC for each client device When you create a PAC manually you must store it in the directory identified by the Certs Path global setting See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for directions for acquiring CA and user certificate files Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating the Wireless Zero Config application is enabled and the MX8 is not connected to a network You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to you
145. ates battery condition It is steady red when the main battery is Low When the battery has sufficient energy the Status LED is unlit The Battery control panel displays main and backup battery charging and power status Start Settings Control Panel Battery About Lithium lon Batteries Li Ion batteries like all batteries gradually lose their capacity over time in a linear fashion and never just stop working This is important to remember the MX8 is always on even when in the Suspend state and draws power from the batteries at all times Tap the q Settings Control Panel Power tab to check the battery status and power reading The following chart is an approximation Actual battery capacity varies based on usage ambient temperature and peripherals drawing power from the MX8 100 capacity 2800 mAh minimum 80 capacity 2280mAh minimum Deciding when to put a fully charged main battery pack in the MXS is difficult to quantify because it is very application specific 2000 mAh may be the cutoff for one customer who uses the mobile device frequently while 1500 mAh may be perfectly fine for a customer who occasionally uses the mobile device You need to determine the point at which battery life becomes unacceptable for your business practices and replace the main battery pack before that point E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 16 Hardware Setup Connecting an External Power Supply Optional The MX8 receives AC DC pow
146. ation Protocol EAP type used for 802 1x authentication to the Access Point Options are None LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC or EAP TLS Note EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop up window Encryption None Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data Options are None Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP CKIP Manual CKIP Auto Manual WEP CKIP or Auto WEP CKIP Note The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP Keys PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop up window MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 173 al Status Tab This screen displays information on the current profile and wireless connection Information cannot be edited or changed on the Status panel Summit Client Utility oki x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default Status Associated Device Name Unnamed IP 172 16 38 209 MAC 00 17 23 00 40 38 AP Name Unknown IP SDC MAC 00 02 2d a8 01 af Beacon Period 100 DTIM 1 Connection Channel 5 Bit Rate 11 Mbps Tx Power 80 mW h 56 dBm Figure 5 6 SCU Status Tab The panel displays e Profile being used e The status of the network connection down associated authenticated etc e The client n
147. be changed by the user Volume and Sounds Access Settings Control Panel Options A Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Disabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Disabled Screen tap Disabled Sounds Scheme LOUD Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately MX8 Reference Guide Volume amp Sounds Pro ka LOK B Volare Sounds oum xm i Loud Soft Enable sounds for V Events warnings system events V Applications Notifications alarms reminders Key clicks o oft O Loud O Screen taps Soft O Loud Volume amp Sounds Pro ok E Volume Sounds Event Asterisk Close Program P Critical Stop Default Sound Empty Recycle Bin de Exclamation i Sound Preview None z ye Scheme r oo H Save As Figure 3 37 Volume amp Sounds E EQ MX8RG A 113 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs Access Files on Flash Cards The SD flash card used for permanent storage of the OS LXE drivers and utilities is built into the CPU board It is also used for registry content back up Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop the
148. c SOR Cables for initial ActiveSync Configuration USB Client to PC Laptop MX8A051MULTICBLUSB Serial Client to PC Laptop MX8A055MULTICBLDA9F When the desktop laptop computer and the MX8 successfully connect the initial ActiveSync process is complete Change Connection Parameters Tap the au Settings Control Panel PC Connection Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose Option Description USB Default This will set up the MX8 to use the USB port direct COMI 57600 This will set up the MX8 to use COM 1 direct at 57600 baud e Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked e Tap OK to return to Settings e Select Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is different than the Connect port COM 1 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A ActiveSync Get Connected Process 117 Backup MX8 Files Use the following process to backup data files from the MX8 to a desktop or laptop PC using the appropriate cables and Microsoft s ActiveSync Prerequisites Initial ActiveSync partnership between the MX8 and the target PC has been completed After the partnership has been established with the mobile device and the host computer ActiveSync can be performed over Serial USB or radio RF Connection Settings lick Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this computer Status Waiting for device to conn
149. canner Programming Guide and the factory defaults barcodes After scanning aaa the scanner engine specific barcode to reset all scanner parameters to factory default r settings i e Reset All Set Factory Defaults Default Settings etc the next step is to open the Control Panel Scanner Properties panel Tap the OK button and close the Scanner panel This action will synchronize all scanner formats E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 110 Settings Control Panel Options al Stylus Access A Settings Control Panel Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Double Tap Stylus Properties oK x Double Tap Double tap this grid to set the double tap E sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps SU rest change adus your settings using the grid above Figure 3 34 Stylus Double Tap Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes The double tap changes take effect immediately Calibration Stylus Properties OK x stylus on the center of the target Double Tap Calibration Repeat as the target moves around the screen If your device isn t Press the Esc key to cancel Carefully press and briefly hold responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate Figure 3 35 Stylus Calibrate Press and hold the styl
150. cate a bad serial port E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 120 ActiveSync Get Connected Process ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins but connection never occurs Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host Or Incorrect or broken data lines in cable ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray The host doesn t know you are trying to connect May mean a bad cable with no control lines connected or an incompatible baud rate Try the connection again with a known good cable Testing connection with a terminal emulator program or a serial port monitor You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of ActiveSync Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits no parity 1 stop bits and the same baud rate as the connection on the CE device After selecting Start Programs Communication Connect on the CE device the word CLIENT appears on the CE display in ASCII format When using a serial port monitor you see the host echo CLIENT followed by SERVER After this point the data stream becomes straight binary PPP Drop down list is blank in the ActiveSync dialog box The radio link is broken Make sure that the radio has a valid IP address MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Utilities 121 Utilities These utilities are pre loaded by LXE Note AppLock Administrator Control panel Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options con
151. certain keymaps are used for special adjustment functions within the keyboard driver via the CHANGE mapname specification MAP VOLUM o MAP VOLUME special keymap for volume adjustment not on MX8 MAP CONTR o MAP CONTRAST special keymap for contrast adjustment not on MX MAP BRITE or MAP BRIGHT special keymap for brightness adjustment not on MX8 When these maps are selected the keyboard driver handles the up arrow and down arrow as adjusting the particular parameter up and down and any other key exits the adjustment state Keys in these modes are handled completely inside the keyboard driver and are not propagated to the operating system Key codes are defined by COLxROWx scancode Scancode has a number of options as follows VK code any valid Windows VK code see below for valid codes x a single ASCII character A b 1 etc SHIFT VK code for a shifted VK code see below for valid codes SHIFT x for a shifted ASCII character should not be needed ACTION code special function key valid codes listed below CHANGE mapname for modifier keys change keymaps to mapname as specified above OPEN an unused key position does nothing when pressed Valid ACTION codes are as follows SCANI Scan key 1 KY ALPHA Alpha mode key Note that specifying the power button in a different location will affect suspend resume functions Keycomp Err
152. ch batch files BAT executable files EXE registry setting files REG or sound files WAV The mechanism is the same as listed above but the appropriate CE application is called depending on file type Registry information is already in the default image for the following 3 autoexec batch file for users convenience HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AUTOEXEC FileName System Autoexec bat Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 50 The file name ALWAYSEXEC or dummy does not really matter as long as there is no file of that name in the directory You can use any name that you want for this entry as long as it is a non existent file name The purpose of this value is that if someone wants to only execute this file one time then you would replace the value of FileCheck with the name of a file that would exist the next time a warm boot occurs Special function makes Launch copy system folders from ATA drive we put it in here so that we control when it happens esp for Applock HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist COP YFOLDERS FileName COPYFOLDERS Installed dword 0 FileCheck Order dword 10 HKEY LOCAL MACHINESOFTWAREWLXEVersist Wifi Utility FileName Windows Wifi_Utility exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 20 5 Summit radio support HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Summit Radio Fil
153. ck The mobile device won t switch from Administration mode to end user mode If two copies of the same application are configured but the application only allows one copy to run at a time for example Microsoft Pocket Word the switch to end user fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed What does this mean When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator the following error message is displayed in a message box Selected hotkey is not allowed Please reenter When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Error Messages 221 Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ing word is output prior to the action described in the message For example Switching to admin hotkey press is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process For all operations that can result in an error an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs These messages contain the
154. ck Mode This function is similar to a regular keyboard s CapsLock key Note that the CapsLock mode stays active until the CapsLock key sequence is pressed again Each time you need to use a Caps function you need to press the Caps key sequence first To cancel CapsLock mode press the Caps key sequence again The CapsLock key sequence is Blue key then the lt Tab gt key Example Example 2B or Not 2B To put the number 2 in a text entry field Tap the lt 2 gt key once To put a lowercase b in a text field Tap the lt Alph gt key then tap the lt 2 gt key twice To put an uppercase B in a text field Tap the lt Alph gt key tap the lt Shft gt key or the lt CapsLock gt key then tap the 2 key twice To enter a string of letters in a text field tap the lt Alph gt key to toggle it On It remains active until it is tapped again and toggled off To enter a string of numbers in a text field make sure the lt Alph gt key is toggled off MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Touchscreen Touchscreen E x tu Figure 2 8 Touchscreen The touchscreen display is an active color LCD unit capable of supporting VGA graphics modes Display size is 240 x 320 pixels in portrait orientation The covering is designed to resist stains The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input A pen stylus is included with the handstrap and the trigger handle The touchscreen responds to an actuation force touch of 4 oz
155. click operation can be performed See note Note A right mouse click function must be programmed by the customer to accept a Tap and Hold function An application can choose to interpret this function as a right mouse click LXE does not support non LXE application programming Keypad Shortcuts Use keyboard shortcuts instead of the stylus e Press lt Tab gt and an lt Arrow gt key to select a file e Once you ve selected a file press Enter to open the file or press lt Alt gt then press Enter to open its Properties dialog e Press Del to delete a file e To force the Start menu to display press lt Ctrl gt and release press Blue and release then press lt Esc gt the Alt key See the section titled Accessories for the stylus replacement kit part number E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 22 Software Setup Software Setup Touchscreen Calibration Note The first time it is used the MX8 automatically runs the touchscreen calibration program If the MX8 is not responding properly to stylus touch taps the touchscreen may need to be recalibrated To recalibrate the screen tap the a Settings Control Panel Stylus Calibration tab Tap the Recalibrate button Follow the instructions on the screen and press the Enter key to save the new calibration settings or press lt Esc gt to cancel or quit Set Time Zone Optional Note The first time it is used or the device returns from a Clear Hive the
156. d bo Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enabled E V Send Key Messages WEDGE Use Illumination LEDs Enabled Y Enable Internal Scanner Sound v Use illumination LEDs Figure 4 2 Scanner Control Main Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Scanner Sound Parameter Function Port Port 1 Internal Radio button allows scanner input output on Port 1 scan key or trigger Port 2 Output is enabled when COMI is enabled on this port Port 3 Output is enabled when COMI is enabled on this port Send Key Messages When Send Key Messages WEDGE is checked any data scan is WEDGE converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window When this box is not checked the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using Wedge Enable Internal The default is Enabled Functionality of the internal scanner driver engine includes audible tones on good scan at the maximum db supported by the speaker and failed scan If enabled Good Scan Bad Scan Vibration provides a tactile response on a scan event Disable this parameter when good scan bad scan sounds are to be handled by alternate means e g application controlled sound files Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers
157. d Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 equipped mobile computer capable of wireless data communications The mobile device can receive and transmit information using an 802 11 b g radio The MX8 can store data for later transmission through an RS 232 or USB port The mobile device is vertically oriented and features backlighting for the display The touch screen display supports graphic features and Windows icons that the Windows CE 5 0 operating system supports Keypads are available in 32 key numeric alpha versions This device is a Windows CE 5 0 compatible computer that can be scaled from a limited function batch computer to an integrated RF scanning computer A trigger handle is available as an accessory The stylus attached to the handstrap is used to assist in entering data and configuring the mobile device Protective film for the touchscreen is available as an accessory The MX8 is powered by a 3000 mAh Lithium Ion main battery pack and an internal Ni MH backup battery Important e Ifthe mobile device has AppLock installed please refer to Chapter 6 AppLock for setup and processing information e Wireless configuration and security parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 2 Overview P Features The following features affect user interaction and internal operation of the MX8 The appropriate wireless client utililty for your device configuration has b
158. de The profile must already exist LXE recommends performing a Suspend Resume function when changing profiles Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin login password has been entered and accepted When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile the Summit Client Utility passes control to Windows Zero Config for configuration of all client and security settings for the network module See Wireless Zero Config Utility later in this chapter for Wireless Zero Config instruction The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the network card Once disabled the button label changes to Enable Radio By default the radio is enabled The Admin Login button provides access to editing wireless parameters Profile and Global may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password The password is case sensitive Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout To logout either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 169 Admin Login To login to Administrator mode tap the Admin login button Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button or a navigation button X or OK to logout The Administrator remains logged in when the SCU is not closed and a Suspend Resume f
159. displayed If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the user is again prompted to enter the credentials Options are An integer from 3 to 60 Note Tap the Commit button to save changes If this panel is closed before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 179 al Summit Wireless Security Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network Your system may require more parameter settings than are listed in these instructions Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements Default profile LXE recommends editing the Default profile instead of creating new profiles Important Perform a Warm boot using the Suspend Resume key sequence after changing parameters to save the changed parameters in the registry Switching profiles Successfully connecting after switching from one profile to another may take up to 30 seconds from the moment the Is not authenticated or Is not Associated messages are displayed Adding changing or LXE recommends performing a Warm boot function using the renaming profiles Suspend Resum
160. e name of the Profile Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig SSID Blank A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Establishes the Service Set Identifier SSID of the WLAN to which the client connects Client Name Blank A string of up to 16 characters The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card The client name may be passed to networking wireless devices e g Access Points Power Save Fast Power save mode is On Options are Constantly Awake Mode CAM power save off Maximum power saving mode and Fast power saving mode E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 172 Summit Client Configuration al Parameter Default Explanation Tx Power Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current regulatory domain Options are Maximum 50mW 30mW 20mW 10mW 5mW or ImW Bit Rate Auto Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the client device Options are Auto 1 Mbit 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 or 54 Mbit Radio Mode BG Rates Specify 802 11g and or 802 11b when communicating with the Full Access Point Options are B rates only BG Rates full G rates only BG optimized Auth Type Open 802 11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point Options are Open LEAP or Shared key EAP Type None Extensible Authentic
161. e E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 205 Tap import Select a cer Ele x Ay System Documents and Settings D Favorites Figure 5 46 Browsing to Private Key Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the private key file change the Type pull down list to Private Keys select the certificate desired and tap OK Tap on View to see the certificate details again The private key should now say Present If it does not there is a problem Possible items to check e Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file as shown earlier in this section If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file generate a new certificate and follow the import process again e Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name for example MXSUSER CER for the certificate and MX8USER PVK for the private key file If the file names are not the same rename the private key file and import it again E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 206 Certificates 3 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Introduction Note Note Chapter 6 AppLock AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other LXE Control Panels For example Keypad Control Panel LaunchApp and RunCmd options LXE has made the assumption in this chapter that the first user to power up a new mobile de
162. e ID Names must be unique from each other however the Name and ID Code may have the same value Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a user friendly manner Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list ID Code textbox ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an identifier the actual Code ID Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab 159 Buttons Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an ite
163. e OK box to save the changes Changes are saved across tabs Tap the X box to discard any changes Tap the for Help The changes take effect immediately Remove Programs Access A Settings Control Panel Remove Programs Note Programs listed in this location are deleted upon warm and cold boot processes Select a program and tap Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately Files stored in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option Note Do not remove LXE installed programs using this option MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 109 Scanner Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Scanner parameters apply to the MX8 integrated scanner imager only Barcode manipulation parameters apply to barcodes scanned by the integrated scanner imager engine only Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panels or via the LXE API functions While the changed configuration is being read the Scanner LED is solid amber The scanner is not operational during the configuration update See Chapter 4 Scanner for explanation and instruction when setting parameters on the Scanner Control Panels Integrated S
164. e a fopen Radio Mode v Encryption EAP Type WEP keys PSKs Credentials i Save Changes Figure 5 17 Configure a Summit Profile for PEAP MSCHAP Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to PEAP MSCHAP Set Encryption to WPA TKIP MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 187 al To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network Enter the Username or Domain Username in the Credentials popup text entry box if desired Enter the Password if desired Leave the CA Certificate Filename blank for now Tap OK Tap Commit O Validate server Use MS store Figure 5 18 PEAP MSCHAP Credentials Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate If using the Windows certificate store Tap the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Tap OK then tap Commit For information on generating a Root
165. e audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the MXS The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon Discovered devices without an icon can be paired as printers or scanners the Bluetooth panel will assign an icon to the device name An icon with a red background indicates the device Bluetooth connection is inactive An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the MX8 and the device Bluetooth connection is active Doubletap a device in the list to open the device properties menu The targeted device does not need to be active MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options Last 4 CX SATO MOBILE C3 GOM4301XP Pair as Printer Disconnect Properties Pair as Scanner Kit s Deskjet deskjet 995c 5 P rrs6z0 36 10 00 C Pair as Scanner Pair as Printer Delete Properties Figure 3 13 Bluetooth Device Disconnect Delete Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the MX8 to receive data from the scanner Tap Pair as Printer to set up the MX8 to send data to the printer Tap Disconnect to stop the connection between the MX8 and a paired Bluetooth device Tap Delete to remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list Tap OK The deleted device name and identifier is gone from the MX8 Bluetooth Devices panel when the control panel reopens Bluetooth Device Properties Figure 3 14 Bluetooth Properties
166. e configured for barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID These are called custom Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog unless Enable Code ID is set to None When the custom Code ID is found in a barcode the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data The dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs if Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol or to replace the list of standard code IDs 1f Enable Code ID is set to Custom When Enable Code ID is set to None custom code IDs are ignored Note Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog and are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself Note When Strip Code ID is enabled the entire custom Code ID string is stripped i e treated as a Code ID ID Code nz Gear an Figure 4 10 Barcode Tab Custom Identifiers After adding changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list tap the OK button to save changes and return to the Barcode panel Parameters Name text box Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Cod
167. e ding eau 254 battery trickle charging sese 15 Battery Backup details ssssssseseeee 61 charge before using sess 15 AE 63 CEA 45 Check status and power reading 15 MXS Reference Guide 262 Compartment cococcconcccnoncconcninonononononnnaconenonnnocanen ns 15 Critical Suspend state 61 Hotswapping ccceesseescessceesceseceeceaeceeeeneeeaeeenes 61 Important 4 6oeotos eet notte eto onedio esee eere bae 3 Life Approximate sssssseseeeeeee 60 Lithium Ion Li Ion sss 45 60 A eoseee i Ones E A toot 61 Malm tt tiefe eb IORE I 60 Main Battery Pack details 60 Publication ssseseseeeeerenn 62 spur rm 62 A suiniesdcisaatsheqeveassinsesaascantevies 60 status LED acuarios reiner eee siete Eins 15 Battery Auto Turn Off sse 95 Battery Power Scheme sees 23 Battery voltage and status display 83 Baud Rate sess 143 Bluetooth barcode reader setup sss 33 dt 32 Initial Use caida 29 LXEZ Pairing specification esses 52 Options ierit tete ioris ii ot ioei 29 Settings tab usen He neos 88 Subsequent Use eren rentes 31 Bluetooth control panel ooooooncnccniccnocnoonconnconnnnoo 84 Bluetooth Properties panel sss 87 Bluetooth S
168. e direct connections disables ActiveSync Change Connection Selecting Change Connection displays a list of configured ActiveSync connections PC Connection Proper jok PC Connection desktop computer using USB Client Change Connection Warning Changing the connection may disable communications with your desktop computer Figure 3 31 PC Connection Please refer to the Backup MX8 Files section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 107 al Power Access A Settings Control Panel Power Please refer to Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout section titled Power Modes Factory Default Settings Power Schemes AC Power User Idle 2 minutes AC Power System Idle 2 minutes AC Power Suspend 5 minutes Battery Power User Idle 3 seconds Battery Power System Idle 15 seconds Battery Power Suspend 5 minutes The mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the device is idle Because of the cumulative effect and using the Battery
169. e is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a value that is not available from the parameter s drop down list Selecting Custom from the drop down list has no effect Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the custom value in the registry Global Paramete rs Parameter Default Function RX Diversity On start on Main How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Access Point Options are Main Only use the main antenna only Aux Only use the auxiliary antenna only On start on Main on startup use the main antenna or On start on Aux on startup use the auxiliary antenna E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 176 Summit Client Configuration al Parameter Default Function TX Diversity On How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point Options are Main only use the main antenna only Aux only use the auxiliary antenna only or On use diversity or both antennas Roam Trigger 65 dBm If signal strength is less than this trigger value the client looks for a different Access Point with a stronger signal Options are 50 dBm 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 dBm or Custom Roam Delta 10 dBm The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must exceed the current Access Point signal strength b
170. e is to use a browser on a desktop PC to navigate to the CA Certificate Authority To request the root CA certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with any valid username and password Connect to 100 100 100 100 se IN Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name a A E T Remember my password OK Cancel Microsoft Certificate Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 28 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Tap the Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL task link MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 195 Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box Microsoft Certificat Download a CA Certificate Certificate Chain
171. e key sequence after tapping the Commit button Note The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the Config tab The reminder feature may not be present in all versions Contact your LXE representative for version upgrades Sign On vs Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered the Summit Client Utility offers two choices e The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen If this method is selected anyone using the mobile device can access the network e The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen When the mobile device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate Note lt is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail How to Use Stored Credentials 1 After completing the other entries in the profile tap the the Credentials button 2 Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and tap the OK button 3 Tap the Commit button 4 ForLEAP and WPA LEAP configuration is complete 5 For PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store 6 ForEAP TLS als
172. e of a trigger handle the handstrap be used at all times The stylus is tethered to the handstrap or the trigger handle LXE pre installs the handstrap when the MX8 is purchased without a trigger handle MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Components 9 al I O Port and Cables Note There is no InfraRed port on the MX8 Tethered scanners are not supported on the MX8 Figure 1 6 I O Port and Cables The pinout for the I O port is located in Appendix B Technical Specifications Cable Multipurpose RS 232 and Power MX8A055MULTICBLDA9F Cable Multipurpose USB and Power MX8A052MULTICBLUSB Adapter Cable Audio MX8A060ADPTCBLVOICE E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 10 Components al MX8 AC Adapter od AC Adapter and AC Power Cable Figure 1 7 5V AC Adapter Assembled Note The MX8 AC Power Adapters MX8A4301 CRDLPSAC and MX8A302CRDLPSACWW are only intended for use with the MX8 multi purpose cables and the MX8 Desktop Cradle Do not connect the adapter cables to any other type of device Figure 1 8 MX8 Cabling Options Note Tethered scanners connected to the MX8 I O port are not supported by LXE MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Quick Start 11 Quick Start Note When your mobile device is pre configured the client keypad and scan aperture configurations are assembled by LXE to your specifications The desktop will display a Summit Client Utility icon This section s instructions are based on the
173. e or Suspend modes even when the device is idle Because of the cumulative effect and using the Battery Power Scheme defaults listed above e The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity e The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15sec 3sec e And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 24 Software Setup a Set The Audio Speaker Volume Note An application may override the control of the speaker volume Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life Figure 1 21 Speaker Location The speaker is located on the front of the device above the MX8 logo The audio volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the listener The volume is increased or decreased one step each time the volume key sequence is pressed The device has an internal speaker and a jack for an external headset Operational beeps are emitted from the speaker Using the Keypad Note Volume amp Sounds in Control Panel must be enabled before the following key sequences will adjust the volume To adjust speaker volume e Tap the Orange key then the Scan key to enter Volume change mode e Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the speaker volume is satisfactory e Press the Enter key to exit this mode Using the Touchscreen Tap the Did Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Volume tab
174. e their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE however the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Following this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface Note On LXE mobile devices with integrated scanners the Scanner Wedge has primary control of the serial ports and must be configured properly to allow the Enabler to access the serial ports Enabler Install Process e Doubletap the Avalanche Enabler CAB file in the System folder The filename is LXE MX8 ENABLER CAB e Warm boot the mobile device Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device e Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder e Warm boot the mobile device The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running See Stop the Enabler Service If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder warm boot the mobile device immediately delete the Avalanche folder and then perform another warm boot
175. eName System SUMMIT CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WWINDOWSWSDCCF10G DLL Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 1 RFTerm support HKEY LOCAL MACHINESOFTWAREWLXEVersistL XE TE FileName System RFTERM CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDO WS LXE RFTERM EXE Order dword 11 run the app after it has loaded and radio is ready HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist RFTERM FileName WINDOWS LXE RFTERM EXE CAB files for options not purchased are not loaded e g JAVA or RFID If a CAB file is missing please contact your LXE Representative MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Utilities 123 al Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 40 Delay dword 1 c Avalanche support HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist A valanche FileCheck System avalanche model dat Installed dword 0 Order dword 4 FileName System LXEAVA CAB HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AvaLaunch Order dword 5 FileName System A valanche Avainit exe FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Installed dword 0 5 Applock support HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AppLockInstall FileName System AppLock CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS APPLOCK EXE Order dword 0 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AppLockPrep FileName windows AppLockPrep exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 1 Delay dword 2
176. each PC will need its own partnership with the MX8 established See section titled Initial Install for the procedure After the partnership has been established with the MX8 and the host computer ActiveSync can be performed over serial USB or radio RF Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher you can synchronize information on your PC with the MX8 and vice versa Synchronization compares the data on the MX8 with the PC and updates both with the most recent data For example you can e Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your mobile device and PC Y our files are automatically converted to the correct format e Back up and restore your mobile device data e Copy rather than synchronize files between your mobile device and PC e g the MX8 LXEbook the user s guide in CE compatible format e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your PC or only when you choose the synchronize command e Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized Note By default ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize The synchronization process makes the data in the information types you select identical on both your PC and your mobile device If an information type is se
177. ect Get Connected IV Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port com zl Status COM port is available IV Allow USB connection with this desktop computer Status USB is available Status Network connections are disabled Status icon V Show status icon in Taskbar Cancel Help Figure 3 38 ActiveSync Connection Settings on a Windows PC MX8 and PC Partnership An ActiveSync partnership between the PC and MX8 has been established See section Initial Setup Serial Port Transfer e A PC with an available serial port and an MX8 with a serial cable The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 95 98 NT 2000 or XP e Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port is checked e LXE recommends using the MX8 multipurpose RS 232 and Power cable listed in the following section titled Connect USB Transfer e A PC with an available USB port and an MX8 with a USB cable The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2 Windows 2000 or Windows XP e LXE specific MX8 multipurpose USB and Power cable as listed in the following section Connect e Allow USB connection with this desktop computer is checked Radio RF Transfer e A PC or laptop with a radio card or wireless connection requires ActiveSync for wireless transfers e The Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer is checked
178. ect to the specified Auto Re Launch Delay in seconds after it terminates This option allows the Administrator to disable the re launch operation AppLock cannot prevent all applications from closing When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing terminates perhaps because of an error condition AppLock re launches the application when this option is enabled Auto Re launch Retries fo Delay pb Note If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re launch and Manual Launch are disabled the application cannot be restarted for the end user or by the end user after the application terminates Auto Re Launch Retries default is 0 tries Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to re launch the application The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and controlled by AppLock Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches Auto Re Launch Delay timer default is 0 seconds no delay Delay is the amount of time AppLock waits prior to re launching an application that has terminated The delay is specified in seconds Valid values are between 0 no delay and 99 seconds AppLock must also be configured to automatically re launch an application To AppLock application termination by the end user is indistinguishable from application termination for any other reason Manual Launch Default is Disabled Enabling th
179. ed WEP LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP WPA LEAP WPA PSK PEAP GTC EAP TLS Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server le A and Access Point for wireless communication The document is available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website A2 It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type ud of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct Date Time authentication will fail E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 166 Summit Client Configuration Summit Client Configuration La Lora cul Summit Client Utility Icon Note Terminology used on your screen displays may be different than those shown in the figures in this chapter Contact your LXE representative for Summit driver updates as they become available Start the Summit Client configuration by tapping the Summit Client Utility icon on the desktop You can also start the Summit Client utility by tapping Start Programs Summit SCU Important After adding a new profile or changing parameters of an existing profile tap Start Suspend When the device Resumes saved changes are applied Summit Client Utility Help Access Start Programs Summit SCU or SCU Icon on Desktop or SCU Icon in Taskbar A POKD x Main Profile Status l Diags Global Figure 5 1 Summit Client Utility SCU The Main tab provides information
180. ed at bootup Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches The default is 0 retries Auto At Boot Delay timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected application when it is automatically launched at bootup Delay default is 10 seconds Valid values are between 0 seconds no delay and 999 seconds The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application it will be either a value specified by the Administrator or it will be the delay default value At startup when a delay has been assigned for each application AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second application to expire before launching the second application AppLock continues in this manner until all applications are launched Note A Global Delay can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application to be launched by lowest Order number and no delay 0 seconds for all other applications Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 216 Multi Application Configuration Auto Re Launch Default is Enabled Auto Re Launch when enabled for a specific application automatically re launches it subj
181. ed device entering Suspend mode going out of range or being turned off When disabled after being enabled the MXS stops searching after 30 minutes This option draws power from the Main Battery MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Bluetooth 31 Subsequent Use Note Taskbar and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered pair connect and disconnect A taskbar Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device A device icon with a red background indicates a disconnected paired device PO Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing application 2 Tap the Settings tab Tap the Discover button When the Bluetooth module begins searching for in range Bluetooth devices the button name changes to Stop Tap the Stop button to cancel the Discover function at any time The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window Doubletap a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window to open the device properties menu Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the MX8 to receive scanner data Tap Pair as Printer to set up the MX8 to send data to the printer Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device Then tap Delete The device name and data is removed from the MX8 Bluetooth Devices list after the next Suspend Resume 9 Upon successful pairing the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection The reaction may be an a
182. ee Chapter 6 AppLock Avalanche Update Settings OK x Figure 3 41 Avalanche Enabler Execution Options Dimmed Auto Execute Selection An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Mobility Center Console can be run automatically following each reboot Select Auto Execute App The drop down box provides a list of applications that have been installed with the Avalanche Mobility Center Console Delay before execution Time delay before launching Auto Execute application MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Server Contact Tab 133 al M Contact at startup Contact when cradled powered Contact periodically Figure 3 42 Avalanche Enabler Server Contact Options Sync Clock Reset the time on mobile computer based on the time on the Mobile Device Server Contact at startup Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the Enabler is accessed Contact when cradled Initiate connection to the Mobile Device Server based on a docking event Not available on the MX8 Contact Periodically Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server and query for updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time Wakeup device if suspended If the time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile Device Server occurs a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can wakeup and proce
183. eeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler Invalid MAPROWS 1 d valid The specified MAPROWS exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler Invalid ROWCOL format A COLxROWX was expected but the format was not correct The only valid formats are COLxROWx COLxxROWx COLxROWXxx or COLxxROWxx where xx are decimal numeric digits 0 9 Invalid scan code The scan code parsed is not recognized The scan code can take one of the following formats VK code rx SHIFT VK_code SHIFT x ACTION code CHANGE mapname OPEN Invalid section name s The section name parsed is invalid The only recognized names are GENERAL SPECIAL or MAP Invalid SHIFT code s The key scan code is specified as SHIFT code but the SHIFT code parsed is not recognized The following values are valid e VK code from the VK code table below e x where x is an ASCII code e g A 3 or Invalid value s in GENERAL section The value name parsed is invalid for the GENERAL section The recognized names are MAPNAME MAPCNT MAPCOLS MAPROWS or ALGOR Invalid value s in MAP section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section The only recognized names are MAP and COLxxx MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps 241 Invalid value s in SPECIAL section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section The only recognized names are KEYSHIFT KEYALT KEY2ND and KEYCONTROL Invalid VK code
184. een pre installed by LXE The desktop will display a Summit Client Utility icon for 802 11 b g configuration and security Optional Windows CE 5 0 No LXE 802 11 b g Radio No Summit Client Utility No Bluetooth Yes 520MHz CPU No 128MB RAM No 128MB 512MB or 1GB SD Flash Yes SE955 Laser Scanner Yes EV 15 Linear Imager Yes 5380SF 2D Imager Yes Voice Yes LXE RFTerm Yes JAVA Yes LXE AppLock Yes Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Yes The MX8 has one mini SD card interface for storage for User data Use only LXE qualified SD Cards see Accessories The MX8 does not have a Bluetooth managed LED The MX8 does not have InfraRed capability The MXS is not approved for use in Hazardous Locations MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Overview 3 Important Battery Information Note The mobile device s backup battery maintains its charge by drawing power from the main battery pack Always store unused devices with a fully charged main battery pack installed LXE recommends an in use mobile device be frequently connected to an external power source to maintain optimum power levels in the main battery pack and the backup battery When the backup battery and main battery pack are dead the mobile device reverts to the last saved setup defaults when a fully charged main battery pack is installed and the device is powered On again Tap a Settings Control Panel Battery tab
185. eesseesnecsessonssansenscaees 16 Putting 1t all together mcr aida 16 Assembling the SV AC Power Adapter rrt eere et e IER TEE ETECHR ERES den EEE TETE Eii 16 Connecting the Multipurpose USB Power Cable enne eren ener nne nnns 17 Connecting the Multipurpose RS 232 Power Cable sess nenne 18 Connecting the Audio Cable and a Headset rtr tiene rettet e eerie iiiter 19 Adjust Microphone and Secure the Cable rti reti re ier ree tie eret diete 19 POWOE tl 20 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen enne nnne nennen nna 21 Keypad SOR CUS 34er eto pte Hi eate A Pete eee Pss 21 Sollware Sets a ido ARMAR EBD DARE 22 Touchscreen CalibietiOl eos aera ee eet teen atre ccu emere nite EER 22 Set Time Zone ODUORD a seno od ero SIT e eremi eret tata 22 Enter Owner Information Optional i ete p rie E aia 22 Set the Display Backlight Titicaca 22 Set the MAS Power Schemes TICS A ia 23 Sel The Audio Speaker Volin c ero ra eer rre eret e asa 24 Usmo ihe Keypa analistas ordei elt adque endo utuntur 24 Using the Touchscreen n occae onn d irte io reru acdeasicd eps reed coc Aa 24 Applying the Protective Filio the Disp ay ans S roe eee ti ea e HARE Rr URN Pit RETE 25 Copy the MX8 LXEbook to the MX8 Optional e ttr re teneor tbi ette rr t e i Ed ee Hid 25 Wireless Client and Network Setup occooconnconccccenccnnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnnn
186. efore roaming to the different Access Point is attempted Options are 5 dBm 10 15 20 25 30 35 dBm or Custom Roam Period 10 sec The amount of time after association or a roam scan with no roam that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI scan data before a roaming decision is made Options are 5 sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 seconds or Custom Frag Thresh 2346 If the packet size in bytes exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold the packet is fragmented sent as several pieces instead of as one block Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interference Options are Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes RTS Thresh 2347 If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send RTS threshold an RTS is sent before sending the packet A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point Options are Any number between 0 and 2347 Ping Payload 32 bytes Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Options are 32 bytes 64 128 256 512 or 1024 bytes Ping Timeout ms 5000 The amount of time in milliseconds that a device will be continuously pinged The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout Options
187. en COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open HKEY CURRENT US HKL 00000409 251 pr ER Keyboard Layout Keymaps Default Head hex 05 0A 08 50 00 00 FE 13 03 0A FE EF 40 48 50 58 Normal32 Map4 hex 72 71 70 28 09 00 00 00 00 00 8C F3 0D 00 00 00 73 74 1 E9 26 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 94 97 12 5ED 00 00 11 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 007 325 35 938 30 E5EF 00 00 F1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 33 967 39 20 F2 00 00 2 Flag4 hex N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 X 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 X 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Orange32 Map5 hex E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TT T6 75 22 09 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 78 79 38 21 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DC 337 BD DB 32 1 BF DC BB 00 00 2 BA 31 00 00 DJ D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MXS Reference Guide 252 Creating Custom Key Maps al DD BC 34 08 00 00 00 BE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Flag5 hex 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 85 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00
188. eping a card out of the MX8 for a long period of time place it in a static free storage container Store in an area that is protected from dirt moisture and electrostatic contact Installation Place the MX8 into Suspend Mode Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX8 Loosen then remove the main battery pack Lift the rubber barrier and hold it aside Do not remove it from the battery well Slide the Mini SD card into the recessed slot label side uppermost until it clicks into place Replace the rubber barrier and the main battery pack and perform a warm boot Always perform a warm boot when exchanging one Mini SD card for another M2 DN Removal Place the MX8 into Suspend Mode Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX8 Loosen then remove the main battery pack Lift the rubber barrier and hold it aside Do not remove it from the battery well Carefully slide the flash card out and away from the recessed slot bh UN Re MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Power Modes 51 Power Modes Modes 1 On 4 Suspend 6 Off Mode Change Cause 2 Power key tapped or Suspend timer has timed out D 3 Power key any key trigger press or touchscreen tap 5 Backup battery and main battery depleted 7 Power Restored and On key pressed Refer to the following mode change explanations O0 0 606 090 Figure 2 4 Power Modes On Suspend and Off On Mode The Display When the display is On e the keyboard touchsc
189. er 0 is first and Order 99 is last note that the order number given here is the decimal equivalent to hexadecimal number 63 Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass but not in a predictable sequence Note If the order of loading is not critical it may be easier to use the System Startup folder instead see below The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded before the next is loaded The delay is given in seconds and defaults to 0 if not specified If the install fails or the file to be installed is not found the delay does not occur E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 122 Utilities The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file usually a CAB file being loaded is a radio driver and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded By default the PCMCIA slots are off on powerup to prevent the Unidentified PCMCIA Slot dialog from appearing Once the drivers are loaded the slot can be turned on The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file but before activating the slot a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on The default values for the default radio drivers listed below is 1 meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up Note that the auto launch process can also laun
190. er for re charging Minimal life expectancy is 2 years E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 254 Appendix B Technical Specifications al Radio 802 11 b g 2 4GHz Compact Flash device in Supports diversity Dynamic control for LXE PCMCIA Adapter Card power management Display Specifications Pinout I O Port Pin Description 1 UART_TXD 2 UART_RTS 3 UART_RXD 4 UART CTS 5 GND 6 USBC D 7 USBC_VBUS 8 HS OUT 9 HS SLEEVE 10 HS DETECT 11 to 13 DC GND 14 UART DTR 15 UART DSR 16 USBC D 17 HS MIC 18 to 20 DC IN MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Appendix B Technical Specifications 255 al Environmental Specifications MX8 See MX8 User s Guide Appendix B AC Wall Adapter North American wall plug no ground Output Connector AC wall adapter has a 5 5mm barrel connector This connects to the LXE cables which transition power to the 20 pin D connector Output Voltage 5V regulated Operating Temperature 32 F to 100 F 0 C to 40 C The LXE approved AC Power Adapter is only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment Storage Temperature 40 F to 180 F 40 C to 80 C fahrenheit degrees temperature centigrade temperature 9 5 32 Operates in a relative humidity of 5 95 non condensing E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 256 Appendix B Technical Spec
191. er from the AC DC 5V Power Supply The MX8 external power connection is part of the RS 232 cable assembly and the USB cable assembly Putting it all together To apply external power to the MX8 follow the steps below in sequence 1 Plug the 2 prong adapter cable end of the external power module into an AC power source e g wall outlet 2 Squeeze the sides of the power connector and push the power cable connector into the MXS I O port until it clicks The click means the connector is seated firmly The System LED above the Scan key illuminates when the MX8 is charging the main battery pack using external power through the power cable The backup battery is always being trickle charged by the main battery pack Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX8 to conserve the main battery power and maintain a charge in the backup battery Assembling the 5V AC Power Adapter Note The MX8 AC Power Adapters MXSA30ICRDLPSAC and MX8A302CRDLPSACWW are only intended for use with the MX8 multi purpose cables and the MX8 Desktop Cradle If the 2 prong AC power cable is not included with the Adapter please contact your LXE representative for assistance Figure 1 14 AC 5V External Power Supply 1l Tocradle Firmly press the cradle end of the power cable into the female connector on the back of the cradle 2 From AC Power to Adapter Firmly press the female end of the power cable into the male connector on the power
192. ernal flash is used for boot loader code and system low level diagnostics code Bootloader code is validated at system startup The UUID required by CE 5 0 is stored in the boot flash Internal Mini SD Memory Card The MX8 has one mini SD card interface for storage for User data The Mini SD slot is accessible from the battery compartment and ships with an LXE qualified 128MB Mini SD card The internal Mini SD card supports a FAT16 file system via a special device driver and appears to the OS as a folder This allows the contents to be manipulated via the standard Windows CE interface Clear Registry MX8 has implemented the hive based registry that can then allow the registry data to persist during a warm boot and cold boot of the OS Hive based registry can only be removed by the ClearHive exe utility Video Subsystem The touchscreen is a 2 8 7 1 cm diagonal viewing area Ya VGA 320 by 240 pixel TFT Transmissive Active Color LCD Backlighting is available and can be turned on and off with key sequences The turn off timing is configured through the Av Settings Control Panel Display Backlight icon The display controller supports Microsoft CE 5 0 graphics modes A touchscreen allows mouse functions tapping on the display or signature capture using an LXE approved stylus The touchscreen has an actuation force with finger less than 100 grams The color display has an LED backlight and is optimized for indoor use The display
193. ess A Settings Control Panel Scanner Vibration tab Factory Default Settings Vibration Main coma Barcode Vibration Scanner Control 2 OK x dali Good Scan Vibration Disabled Off Bad Scan Vibration Enabled Long Figure 4 11 Scanner Control Vibration tab Enable short medium or long duration when a tactile response is desired on a good scan bad scan or both event is desired Scan sounds are accompanied by a tactile response when the internal scanner Sound parameter is enabled Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 164 Vibration Tab al MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction Summit 1 3 11 The MX8 mobile device has a wireless client that can be configured for no encryption WEP encryption or WPA security no authentication and all authentications listed below Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authentications Please refer to the Certificates section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys e The Summit profile settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security option chosen Wireless Security Options Support
194. ettings Password j Confirm password C En pe sword protection at C Enable password protection for screen saver Figure 3 30 Password Enter the password in the Password textbox then type it again to confirm it Enable the power on checkbox and if desired the screensaver checkbox Tap the OK button to save the changes The password is in effect immediately The screensaver password is the same as the power on password They are not set independently A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the Enable password protection at power on checkbox The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the power on checkbox is enabled Troubleshooting The password must be entered before performing a cold boot or cold reset If entering a power on or screensaver password will not allow you to disable password protection or perform Cold boot contact LXE Technical Support E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 106 Settings Control Panel Options al PC Connection Access A Settings Control Panel PC Connection Control the connection between the MX8 and a nearby desktop laptop computer Factory Default Settings Enable direct connection Enabled Connect Using USB Client Tap the Change Connection button to adjust the settings Then tap the OK button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Unchecking the Enabl
195. ettings Chart sss 88 Boot loader ecu be RID CROP 67 C CAB files iet ette o c etus 122 CAB Files on the Flash Card 113 Cable Adapter Audio ette trees 9 Multipurpose RS 232 and Power 9 Multipurpose USB and Power 9 Calibrate touchscreen sse 22 Calibration resne urosme e reeta 110 CapsLock mode function esses 58 Certifica ii rt eaten read 9 loni cr 194 USSR siete diee tee e ei reete eee D REESE 198 Certificates are date sensitive ssesssss 165 Change the Time and Date sess 11 Change the volume setting sss 24 Character Recognition Touchscreen cococccoccconononononannonncononnconorononoranonnonnons 76 Charger bou M eka tal 63 Charging Battery Time Required sssssssssseeeee 45 Check battery status 60 Clean display and aperture esses 59 Clear Contents of Document Folder 77 Clear Internet cache eee 97 MX8 Reference Guide Clear registry settings essen 140 Client and Network Setup ssssssseeeee 26 Code ID Enable sse 149 Code ID atlas rein edu 158 Cold BOO utilice 48 COLDBOOT EXE eeeeeeeerenrene nene 124 COM Port e iii iia 143 Configurations sess 46 COMI
196. etwork Manual Settings Properties DNS 139 Wireless Network DNS Wireless Dm o igned IP address O Use the following IP address IP Subnet 255 255 240 0 Gateway 172 16 95 254 Manual Settings Properties i X Network DNS wireless Manual Settings Properties OK x Network DNS Wireless Name server addresses may be re assigned if DHCP is enabled Manage wireless settings SSID Encryption Ezra Encryption Data E ll lb ll L ce LE ll Os For device specific descriptions of these Enabler parameters refer to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Status Tab E EQ MX8RG A LXE does not recommend enabling Manage Wireless Settings Figure 3 49 Manual Settings Properties Panels When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters panel see Figure titled Avalanche Enabler Adapters Options Network Until these options are enabled the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third party software associated with these settings The Status panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the drop down box Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button When tapped
197. evice can be chosen by the user to replace the default mobile device keymap and then switched back when they are finished using the customized keys IMPORTANT The keycomp utility included with the MX8 SDK is not the same as the one included with the MX3X SDK This one only generates maps for the MX8 Custom keymaps for the mobile device are created on a desktop PC using the command line compiler KEYCOMP EXE Keycomp processes the input keymap source file and outputs a registry text file Note Each VK_code has a numeric value for example VK_F20 hex 83 these are documented in the SDK include file WINUSER H from Microsoft The numeric value is what needs to go into the registry Whether the value is hex or decimal depends on the registry editor being used the one in the mobile device can use either hex or decimal but the desktop one used over ActiveSync that a developer may use requires hex Example KEYCOMP DEFAULT KEY writes KEYCOMP REG to local directory Input File gt Compiler 5 Text File DEFAULT KEY KEYCOMP EXE KEYCOMP REG This output file should be renamed to xxx REG the suffix must remain REG then copied to the mobile device over ActiveSync Once the file is loaded on the mobile device double tap the file from the Windows CE Explorer desktop This will run the REGLOAD utility to put it into the registry and save the registry to non volatile flash The keymap is now a perm
198. eypress instead of two when you want to use the ESC function Setting the Diamond 1 key to function as an ESC key does not disable the function of the standard ESC key sequence Blue Alt Key 1 Shift Jeno key gt Blue Jeno key gt Figure 2 7 Mappable Diamond Keys The Diamond 1 key defaults to Field Exit on the keypad All other Diamond keys and Diamond Sticky keys have no assigned default value i e their default value is lt no key gt To edit the diamond key parameters Tap Dd Settings Control Panel Mappable Keys tab Change the parameter values using the drop down list and tap OK to save the changes The change takes effect immediately See Also Appendix A Key Maps These keys can be mapped by the user to generate any key code defined by Windows CE with the exception of Shift Alt Ctrl Left Right Shift Alt Ctrl MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A The Keypad 55 d LED Indicators See Appendix A Key Maps for instruction on the specific key presses to access all keypad functions System Status The System Status LED is located at the top left of the keypad above the Scan button When the LED is The Statusis Action to be taken Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Blinking Red Power Fail Or Connect MXS to external AC power Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Steady Red Main Battery Low Or Connect MX8 to external AC
199. f desired Enter the Password if desired Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a warm boot or Suspend Resume to connect using the new profile configuration See Also LEAP w o WPA earlier in this section to configure the client for LEAP without WPA See Also Sign on vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter 1f the username and password are left blank during setup MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 189 WPA PSK Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility Ez oK E Man Profile status Diags Global m Default E SDC New Rename Delete Scan Radio Bit Rate a open l Radio Mode v Encryption EAP Type Jwapsk m y WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Figure 5 21 Configure a Summit Profile with WPA PSK Encryption Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to None Set Encryption to WPA PSK Tap the WEP keys PSK Keys button For Passphrase enter 8 63 chars For PSK enter 64 Hex chars Figure 5 22 Summit PSK Entry Dialog Enter the Passphrase in the PSK Entry popup text entry box This value can be a 64 hex character or an 8 63 byte ASCII value Tap OK Tap the Com
200. figuration at the end of this chapter for instruction See also Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Desktop 69 Desktop For general use instruction please refer to commercially available CE user s guides or the CE on line Help on the MX8 Note Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX8 to conserve the main battery and to ensure the backup battery is charged The MX8 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a laptop desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP At a minimum it has the My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin icons that can be tapped with the stylus to access the contents At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Tapping the Start button causes the Start Menu to pop up It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run The Start Menu Shutdown option found on most desktop PC s has been replaced with a single command Suspend because the MX8 is always powered On when a fully charged main battery and backup battery are present Tap the Suspend button to turn the screen off or tap the red Power button to turn the screen off and place the MX8 into Suspend mode Tap the Power button to wake the unit up Desktop Icon Function My Device
201. follow the instructions for Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device later in this chapter 3 When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication be sure to check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox 4 The default is to use all certificates in the store If this is OK skip to Step 78 5 Otherwise to select a specific certificate tap the Browse button Choose certificate x I Use Full trusted store VeriSign Time Stamping CA Microsoft Root Certificate Auth Symantec Root 2005 CA Microsoft Root Authority Microsoft Authenticode tm Root Symantec Root CA y Micrneel Ft Timactarn Dank Select Figure 5 10 Choose Certificate 6 Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox 7 Select the desired certificate and tap the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert textbox 8 Tap OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes How To Use the Certs Path 1 Follow the instructions later in this chapter for Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC 2 Copy the certificate to the specified Windows folder on the mobile device The default location for Certs Path is System A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after warmboot E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 182 Summit Client Configurati
202. for End AAA AAA 257 ASCI Control mn 258 INDEX 261 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Table of Contents 11 Illustrations Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 1 24 Figure 1 25 Figure 1 26 Figure 1 27 Figure 1 28 Figure 1 29 Frontot ND S sie idet mt lareo dali cis 5 NO 6 Scanner ADOPDUEG sica aiii ina di T Trigger Handle Optional tinte n ee iii 7 Handstrap Optional iei ttn Petite ei ia tias 8 DO Post atid Cables aia 9 5V AC Adapter Assembled 5 ene ee a 10 MXS Cabling Options ieri d Ra eL i epe Ui RR ica 10 MXS Desktopuisuauecncene io etie tede a n ei a de ici 11 Trigger Handle Attach Poitits ics isi etri ret verd ii 13 MXS Hand ao EMI E 14 Maiti Battery Packs ita iii ii 15 USB MXS Power Assembly eet C bad 16 AC SV External Power Suppl rinda 16 Connect Power Cableto the Cradle cin 17 Connect the USB Power Cable to the MXS BOE nets pecora ce FERNER RED RE bie ER ERE UE UEN 17 Connect the RS 232 7 Power Cable to the MX8 Porto ERE 18 Audio Cable and Headset s eod into 19 Power Key EoGatlOfico uosecuseiicot e Ped ese ECOE ERR UU HIC ena ani ea HORE CS 20 US PSM MO Gi write un P ita 20 Speaker Location eite teda Eie reo e Pleno RH DL DE DR CR CH EHE I NIE
203. from the dropdown list and make changes to the parameters Tap the Save button to save any changes renaming the scheme if desired Tap the Delete button to delete schemes Tap the Apply button to apply the selected scheme to the MX8 Tap the OK box to exit or X to escape without making any changes Saved changes take effect immediately When the backlight timer expires the screen backlight is dimmed not turned off Default values are 3 seconds for Battery and 2 minutes for External and both the check boxes are enabled Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes or the X button to escape without making any changes Tap the button for Help The changes take effect immediately E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 5 g 96 Settings Control Panel Options Input Panel Access A Settings Control Panel Input Panel Select the current key data input method Factory Default Settings Input Method Keyboard Allow applications to Enabled change input panel state Options Keys Small keys Use gestures Disabled Input Panel Properties 2 lok Input Panel Current input method Options Y Allow applications to change the input panel state To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears Figure 3 22 Input Panel Use this screen to make the Input Panel or the physical
204. g CA and User Certificates This value is masked when the Admin is logged out Options are none For example when the valid certificate is stored as My Computer System M Y CERTIFICATE CER enter System in the Certs Path text box as the Windows folder path CCX or CCX Features Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions CCX radio management and Access Point specified maximum transmit power features Options are On Off WMM Off Use of Wi Fi Multimedia extensions Options are On Off Tray Icon Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray Options are On Off Aggressive Scan When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens the radio aggressively scans for available APs Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning set through Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period Aggressive scanning should be set to On unless there is significant co channel interference due to overlapping APs on the same channel Options are On Off E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 178 Summit Client Configuration al Parameter Default Function Auth Timeout 8 seconds Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the association fails No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is
205. ge settings Set the user interface language and the default input language Factory Default Settings Region Locale English United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 123 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd vyyy long Language User Interface English United States Input Language English United States US Installed English United States US Regional and Language E ok x Region language Input Regional and Language E ok x Region Language Input Default Input Language Select the input language to use when you start your device Regional and Language E ok x Region Input User Interface Language The option will determine the language used for the menus dialogs and alerts english United States US Appearance samples Time 2 48 20 PM Short date 7 21 2005 Long date Thursday July 21 2005 Installed Input Languages Select input languages you plan to use English United States v English United States US Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 00 Figure 3 33 Regional Settings Tap the Customize button to assign a different format for dates times numbers and currency Adjust the settings and tap th
206. gistry settings needed to specify the application additional registry settings are needed to store the configuration options for AppLock These options include among others the administrator s password and hotkey HKI HKI EY OCA EY OCA MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration EP HotKey MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A 230 AppLock Registry Settings al MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Introduction 231 al Appendix A Key Maps Introduction Remember Sticky keys are also known as second function keys Ctl Ctrl Alt Shft Blue and Orange keys are sticky keys Sticky keys do not need to be held down before pressing the next or desired key It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys Note The key mapping in this appendix relates to the physical keypad See section titled Input Panel for the Virtual or Soft Keypad used with the stylus 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad When using a sequence of keys that require an alpha key first press the Alph key Use the Shft sticky key or the Caps key sequence Blue Tab for upper case alphabetic characters Pressing the Alph key forces Alpha mode for the 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 keys The 1 and 0 keys continue to place a 1 and 0 into the text field To create a combination of numbers and letters before pressing Enter remember to tap
207. he Symbology field Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them to prevent deactivating the scanner completely When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed the settings in this dialog become the defaults used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies This is also true for Custom IDs where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user Note In Custom mode on the Barcode tab any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped because they will not be recognized as code IDs If a specific symbology s settings have been configured a star will appear next to it in the Symbology drop down box so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults If a particular symbology has been configured the entire set of parameters from that MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab 151 symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology In other words either the settings for the configured symbology will be used or the default settings are used not a combination of the two If a symbology has not been configured does not have an next to it the settings for All are used which is not necessarily the defaults Parameters Enable This checkbox enables checked or disables unchecked the symbology field The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the ty
208. he Settings Tab 3 Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings display The Bluetooth MXS default name is determined by the LXE factory installed software version LXE strongly urges assigning every MX8 a unique name up to 32 characters before Bluetooth Discovery is initiated 4 Check or uncheck the MX8 Bluetooth options on the Settings tab 5 Tap the OK button to save your changes or the X button to discard any changes See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth Settings Tab Bluetooth Options Note These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled As Bluetooth devices pair with the MX8 the name of the device and an icon representing the type of device is displayed in the Devices window The icon state changes as the paired Bluetooth devices connect and disconnect from the MX8 When the Bluetooth devices are disconnected the device icon has a red background E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 30 Bluetooth Report when connection lost A dialog box appears on the MX8 display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped This option is enabled by default Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report when reconnected A dialog box appears on the MX8 display notifying the user a connection between one or all of the previously paired Bl
209. he application which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker Windows accelerator keys such as Alt F4 are disabled MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Passwords 211 Passwords A password must be configured If the password is not configured a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password In addition to the Administrator hotkey press a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured If the configured hotkey is pressed the password prompt is displayed In this case the user has 30 seconds and within three attempts to enter a password If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end user mode All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt this is because the other situations result in invalid end user operation These conditions include e If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator i e an application is specified that does not exist e Ifthe application name which is mandatory for end user mode is missing in the configuration e Invalid inst
210. he maximum value allowed for that symbology the maximum valid length will be used instead E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 152 Barcode Tab Strip Leading Trailing Control Strip Leading Code ID 7 Trailing F Figure 4 6 Symbology Strip Leading Trailing This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is buffered for the application If all values are set Code ID takes precedence over Leading and Trailing Barcode Data stripping is performed last Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added so does not affect them If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data it becomes a zero byte data string If in addition Strip Code ID is enabled and no prefix or suffix is configured the processing will return a zero byte data packet which will be rejected The operation of each type of stripping is defined below Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This is disabled by default Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This is disabled by default Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Barcode tab By default Code ID strippi
211. heck the Use full trusted store checkbox e e e e Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Tap OK then tap Commit MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 191 For information on generating a Root CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter Perform a Warm Boot or Suspend Resume function to connect using the new profile configuration The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP GTC for the user authentication See Also Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter 1f the username and password are left blank during setup EAP TLS Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Admin Login password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility oki x New Rename petete Scan Radio Bit Rate pe 3 Radio Mode v Encryption EAP Type wea TKIP y WEP keys PSks Credentials Save Changes Commit Figure 5 25 Configure a Summit Profile with EAP TLS Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to EAP TLS Set Encryption to WPA TKIP To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials butt
212. hinese Japanese Korean Font filename simsun ttc mingliu ttc msgothic ttc gulim ttc Notes These Asian fonts are ordered separately and built in to the MX8 OS image Built in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup Thai Hebrew Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the default extended fonts See About Software Language for the name of any installed fonts When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the card System folder the font works for Asian web pages the font works with RFTerm the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Control Panel the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names the font does not work for third party NET applications and the font does not work for some third party MFC applications E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 100 Settings Control Panel Options al Mappable Keys Access A Settings Control Panel Mappable Keys Icon Use this option to assign key sequences to Diamond keys Factory Default Settings 32 Key Keypad Diamond 1 No sticky key Field Exit Shift Diamond 1 No key Blue Diamond 1 No key Diamond 2 No sticky key No key Shift Diamond 2 No key Diamond 3 No sticky key No key Shift Diamond 3 No key Mappable Keys ok E Key1 key2 key3 wl EII Shift Jeno key gt l Shift Jeno key gt y Blue lt no key gt lw
213. icity It is an important limitation that the keymap must have a 4 5 or 6 digit numeric name this is a limit of the Microsoft Windows CE layout manager The format of this file is familiar to anyone who has used INI files under Windows There is a section header in square brackets followed by various values in the form value data Lines beginning with a semicolon or empty lines are ignored as comments Spaces or tabs before or after the information are stripped off and ignored Case is ignored in section names value names and value data Note Before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection go to Start Settings Control Panel Keyboard and select Default from the keymap popup Tap OK COLxROWx Format Note There is no relationship between the physical layout COL ROW of the keyboard keypad and the COL ROW listing in the key map file The key map file represents the electrical layout not the physical layout All keys are specified in COLXROWx format In this format the first x is the 1 or 2 digit column in the keymap and the second x is the 1 or 2 digit row in the keymap All rows and columns are enumerated starting with zero 0 In the MAP section the COLXROWx is the value name and the values must be less than the MAPROWS and MAPCOLS specified in the GENERAL section In the SPECIAL section the COLxROWxX is the value data and the values given can be outside the normal key map limits GENERAL Sectio
214. ide contains instruction explanations and troubleshooting information for the MXS end user MX8 Cradle Reference Guide contains user instruction technical and troubleshooting information for the MX8 desktop cradle MX8 Multi Charger User s Guide contains user technical and troubleshooting information for the MX8 battery multi charger Entering the AppLock Activation Key Hotkey Touch MX8 Reference Guide See Also Chapter 6 AppLock If the mobile device uses LXE s AppLock to allow the user to switch between two applications the default Activation key is Ctrl Spe The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications Note The touch panel must be enabled Tap the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen Tap one of the application icons in the popup menu The selected application is brought to the foreground while the other application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application running in the foreground only E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Setup 13 Hardware Setup Installing Trigger Handle Optional The MX can be purchased with a customer installable pistol grip handle The handle enables the user of the MXS to hold the unit while pointing and activating the scanner with the trigger
215. ifications al Radio Specifications Summit Client oewwTemem ore Temper CET CET CET Operating Temperature see Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see Environmental Specifications Connectivity TCP IP Ethernet ODI Diversity Hotswapping Bluetooth Enhanced Data Rate Up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air No less than 32 80 ft 10 meters line of sight Bluetooth Version 2 0 EDR MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Appendix B Technical Specifications List of Valid VK Codes for CE 257 Pr This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further clarification of the meaning of these key codes Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under Windows CE VK ADD VK F3 VK NUMPAD9 VK APOSTROPHE VK F4 VK OEM CLEAR VK APPS VK F5 VK OFF VK ATTN V
216. ighlighted digital certificate Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates See Also Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for instruction E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 92 Settings Control Panel Options al COM1 Access A Settings Control Panel COM1 Factory Default Settings COMI I O port Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Bits 8 O 115200 O 57600 O 38400 Data Bits OE IS Figure 3 18 COM1 COMI port default values are 9600 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and No parity If these values are changed the default values are restored after a cold boot or reflashing Note COMI does not support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners See Also Chapter 4 Scanner MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options Date Time Access A Settings Control Panel Date Time Icon If required set Date Time Time Zone and assign a Daylight Savings location Factory Default Settings Time Zone GMT 05 00 Daylight Savings Enabled Date Time Properties 2 lok E KI July 2005 SMTWTEF 27 28 29 30 1 345678 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 3i Y 4 3 4 56 2 30 42 PM Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp
217. igute 5 34 Logonto Certificate Authority copia epi ias idad 198 Figute 5 35 Centificate Services Welcome Orce ucraniano tano Rx ec PIE EA EREA 198 Figure 5 30 Requesta Cer ficate Type siano vie oen e E E EEE 199 Figure 5 37 Advanced Certificate Request Stella coord 199 Figure 5 38 Advanced Certificate Deliciosa iia DURER Echo iS 200 Figure 3 39 Script Wearing actas idad lacras 201 Figure 5 40 Script Wann gs je pain daii niendo liinda 201 Figure 5 41 User Cerilieate I3U6 c etes oce a Epit esee bie ree e aeea er aconteci 201 Figure 5 42 Download Certificate Security W arith gs unas edison 202 Figure 5 43 My Cerilicates SOTE Sessan nere ae e E eSa O EEE P ESEE RASE E 203 Figure 5 44 Import User Corte ate e 203 Figure 5 45 Browsing to Certificate Located pe EYE EU HEX EENE 204 Figure 5 46 Browsing to Private Key Location ii nete roe eueep ree E ERR ER REUS ERU HR RE rae NSE 205 Figure 6 1 AppLock Panels me 209 Figure 6 2 Swaitchpad IM s risp 212 Eienre6 3 Application Panel s eeu codi T arrasando proa 213 Figure o Application Launch OODGODS essa ion facina 215 Piste e eea aee A A E E EHI CU H TITO eie E 218 Eiente 5 6 Status Panel 25i E E meu tatit E E tei E E NE 219 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 14 Table of Contents al MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Overview Chapter 1 Introduction The LXE MXS is a rugged portable hand hel
218. ing setup EAP FAST Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility ok x Main Profle status Diags obal Profle pat m Ed Radio Bit Rate 2 fopen Radio Mode b d Encryption EAP Type WPA TKIP am WEP keysfPSks Credentials Save Changes Figure 5 15 Configure a Summit Profile for EAP FAST Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to EAP FAST Set Encryption to WPA TKIP To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network The SCU supports EAP FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning With automatic PAC provisioning the user credentials whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen are sent to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on the RADIUS server configuration To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 186 Summit Client Configuration al Password PAC
219. ings Control Panel Power Battery tab connect the AC adapter to the MX8 before replacing the main battery pack Main Battery Pack The main battery pack has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary rigors of an industrial environment Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the MX8 Multi Charger or the MX8 unit The battery pack enclosure functions as the protective cover for the battery well When the main battery pack is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of operation depending upon use and accessories installed The battery pack is resistant to impact damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface Under normal conditions a fully charged battery should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge The more you use the scanner or the wireless transmitter the shorter the time required between battery recharges MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Power Supply 61 Battery Hotswapping Important When the backup battery power is Low ay Settings Control Panel Power Battery tab connect the AC adapter to the MX8 before replacing the main battery pack When the main battery power level is low the MX8 will signal the user with the low battery warning indicator the Status LED remains a steady red that continues until the main battery is replaced the ba
220. ink Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Advanced Certificate Request The policy of the CA determines the types of certificates you can request Click one of the following options to Create and submit a request to this CA Submit a certificate request by using a base 64 encoded CMC or PKCS 10 file or submit a renewal request by using a base 64 encoded PKCS 7 file Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user by using the smart card certificate enrollment station Note You must have an enrollment agent certificate to submit a request on behalf of another user Figure 5 37 Advanced Certificate Request Screen Tap on the Create and submit a request to this CA link E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 200 Certificates P Microsoft Certifica Advanced Certificate Request Certificate Template User H Key Options Create new key set Use existing key set CSP Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 El Key Usage Exchange Key Size 1024 MAE common key sizes 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 Automatic key container name User specified key container name v Mark keys as exportable v Export keys to file Full path name userlkey pvk Enable strong private key protection Store certificate in the local computer certificate store Stores the certificate in the loca computer store instead of in
221. install Process sss 125 End user switching A teta etes 212 end user flash card sss 113 E ntenng Data eie pter ee tenes 36 Environmental Specifications 255 Error Messages Applock eer ei hee Pens 221 PUE 0 217 EV 15 linear imager c oococnnncnoninnnonconcnnnancnncnnnonannninno 47 Example Barcode processing sene 160 Execution Avalanche eese 132 Expand Control Panel esee 77 External Auto Turn Off sss 95 External Connector Interface 253 External modem not supported sss 66 Exteinal DS toi rdi tee tees 16 E EQ MX8RG A 263 F Factory Default Settings Summit Clean 175 Factory Default reset registry to ss 140 Dri m 2 MAS EE 1 ETS n ee E E 253 Flash and Reflash see 141 Fonts and keymaps sseseeeee 99 POPMS G1 thy tiersen best reo see tive Foo SERE enie NERE 36 Function a s E bins video tuations 57 Alt Key A ecsieei sisti tee totg 56 CapsLock Mode sese 58 A A xt t sien ertt ens 56 SNARK c a 56 G General system parameter sse 111 Grothe Helps heise uoo diosa 39 Getting Started sse 11 Getting the Most from Your Batteries 62 Global parameters
222. ion Manual WEP Tap the WEP keys PSK Keys button The WEP Key Entry text entry box appears WEP Key Entry Enter 10 or 26 Hex digits 4 F 0 9 OR enter 5 or 13 ASCII characters Tx Key e oa sis a Of Figure 5 12 Summit WEP Keys Enter the WEP key If there are more than one set of keys tap the radio button in front of the Key to be used WEP keys may be entered in Hex or ASCII format For previous versions of the SCU if the WEP key entry does not offer a choice between Hex and ASCII the key must be in Hex refer to the Hex Key Format segment that follows Once configured tap OK then tap the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Config 1s selected on the Main tab and warm boot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network Hex Key Format Valid keys are 10 for 40 bit encryption or 26 for 128 bit encryption hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F Enter the key s and tap OK ASCII Key Format Valid keys are 5 for 40 bit encryption or 13 for 128 bit encryption alphanumeric characters Enter the key s and tap OK E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 184 LEAP w o WPA Authentication Summit Client Configuration al MX8 Reference Guide If the Cisco CCX certified Access Point AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type client parameter to Open If the AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type client parameter to LEAP
223. ircuitry which in turn recharges the main battery and backup battery Frequent connection to an external power source if feasible is recommended to maintain backup battery charge status as the backup battery cannot be recharged by a dead or missing main battery Wireless Client 802 11b g The MX8 supports an LXE 802 11b g radio The LXE radio supports diversity with two internal antennas The CPU board does not allow hot swapping the radio Adjusting power management on the radio is set to static dynamic control WEP WPA and LEAP are supported E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 46 Hardware Configuration pr COM Port The MX8 has one 20 pin multifunction I O port that can be configured by the user Note The MX8 AC Power Adapters MX8A301 CRDLPSAC and MX8A302CRDLPSACWW are only intended for use with the MX8 multi purpose cables and the MX8 Desktop Cradle Figure 2 2 COM1 Port The COMI port pinout diagram is located in Appendix B Technical Specifications RS 232 Serial Port Configured as COMI Bi directional full duplex and supports data rates up to 115 Kb s The port does not have RI or CD signals nor does it support 5V switchable power on pin 9 for tethered scanners The serial port driver supports full duplex communications over the serial port It supports data exchange via ActiveSync but does not automatically start ActiveSync when connected The Adapter RS 232 terminal port to D9 male accessories can be used
224. is 80 dBm or weaker The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 80dBm but not stronger than 60 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 60 dBm but not stronger than 40 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 40 dBm amp E B B E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 168 Summit Client Configuration Main Tab Factory Default Settings Main Admin Login SUMMIT Radio Enabled Active Config Profile Default Regulatory Domain FCC or ETSI a lox x Main Profile Status Diags Global Admin Login SUMMIT f 1 DATA COMMUNICATIONS Ls Active Profile Default y Status Disabled Radio Type BG Reg Domain FCC Driver v1 03 11 SCU v1 03 09 About SCU Figure 5 2 SCU Main Tab The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including SCU Summit Client Utility version Driver version Radio Type the radio is an 802 11 b g radio Regulatory Domain Copyright Information can be accessed by tapping the About SCU button Active Config profile Active Profile name Status of the client Down Associated Authenticated etc The Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Administrator mo
225. is option allows the end user to launch the specified application s Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the Switchpad accompanied by a checkmark that indicates the application is currently active or available for Launching When an application name is tapped by the end user the application is launched if inactive and brought to the foreground Manual Applications set up with Manual Launch enabled may or may not be launched at bootup This function is based on the application s Auto At Boot setting The applications have been listed as approved applications for end user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure The approved applications are listed on the Switchpad A checkmark indicates the applications active status When Manual Launch is disabled for an application and Allow Close is enabled for the application when the end user closes the specific application it is no longer available shown on the Switchpad When Auto At Boot and Manual Launch are both disabled for a specific application the application is 1 not placed on the list of approved applications for end user manual launch and 2 never launched and 3 not displayed on the Switchpad MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Multi Application Configuration 217 al Allow Close Default is Disabled When enabled the associated application can be closed by the end user Allow Close This option allows the administrator
226. is running on external power e g AC adapter powered vehicle or desktop cradle The default value for the battery power timer is 3 seconds The default value for the external power timer is 2 minutes and the checkbox is enabled The backlight will remain on all the time when both checkboxes are blank MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Software Setup 23 Set the MX8 Power Schemes Timers Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the MXS Select 4 Settings Control Panel Power Schemes tab Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes Battery Power Scheme Use this option when the MX8 will be running on battery power only Switch state to User Idle Default is After 3 seconds Switch state to System Idle Default is After 15 seconds Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes AC Power Scheme Use this option when the MX8 will be running on external power Switch state to User Idle Default is After 2 minute Switch state to System Idle Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes These mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idl
227. is stripped i e treated as a Code ID UPC EAN Codes only The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list of standard Code IDs When Enable Code ID is set to Custom Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code IDs When Enable Code ID is set to Custom AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of the Custom Code ID For example if a Custom Code ID AAA is created to be read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 A1 the Custom Code ID must be entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID JA1AAA When Enable Code ID is set to None Code IDs are ignored Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog but will be processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the Code ID The external scanner operation cannot be controlled by the MX8 scanner driver therefore a good beep may be sounded from the external scanner even if a barcode from an external scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified The MX8 will still generate a bad scan beep to indicate the barcode has been rejected MXS Reference Guide 150 Barcode Tab Barcode Symbology Settings The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured The features a
228. itch applications Multi AppLock ooooonocncccoccnoccnoccconinononnnonnnnononnnnnos 12 Symbology seen 150 strip leading strip trailing ssss 152 Symbology settings sese 148 System Configuration ooococcocnnonononcnononnnonnnonnnnanonnnnnos 65 System Hardware Configuration 43 System MeMOlTY ocooococccononccononononanoncnononcconononnncnnncncnnos 44 System Status LED sese 55 T Taskbar defaults see 76 Technical specifications bootloader cintia 67 version control eese 67 Technical Specifications sss 253 Terminal Emulation parameters s 26 Tethered scanners iier ette 38 Tile i exis 95 SA teer p e meret na 93 Timer battery power timer 22 cumulative effect sess 23 external power timer c oooocnccnocccoconononnnonnconncon conos 22 Touch Screen and Keypad Shortcuts 21 Touch Screen and the Stylus s 21 TO chscreeti iet ii 59 AU Mu 22 and data li 37 TANS CMD ER asse ect carte ea st 76 Translate ATL ci eer mt a 157 Translate control codes sss 157 Transmissive Display eee 59 Trigger Handle 2 eere e ete etes 7 Troubleshooting Appl siii tatit edge 220 Troubleshooting AC VeSyllC
229. k dll The load of the keyboard filter failed This occurs when LOG ERROR the dll is missing or is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete applock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting applock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs LOG EX Could not create event The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator LOG ERROR EVT HOTKEYCHG Control panel The event could not be created Could not hook keyboard If the keyboard cannot be controlled AppLock cannot LOG ERROR process the hotkey This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode Could not start thread HotKeyMon The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes The LOG ERROR watch process could not be initiated Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry LOG EX Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG EX HotKey processing Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Decrypt acquire context failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt acquired context OK Decryption process ok LOG EX Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok LOG EX Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt imported key OK Decryption process ok LOG EX Encrypt acquire context failure Un
230. keypad primarily available when entering data Tap the Options button to set the size of the keys displayed on screen and whether gestures are enabled or disabled Tap the OK button to save any changes and exit or tap the X button to exit without saving any changes Tap the button for Help Note Check with your LXE representative for language packs as they become available MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 97 al Internet Options Access A Settings Control Panel Internet Options Set options for internet connectivity Internet Options lok E3 General connection Security pri Start Page Internet Options ok B General Connection security pri gt Internet Options lok E3 general Somerton security pri htto fwww he com C Use LAN no autodial Search Page Autodial name Internet Loc Trusted sit ESTER intranet Network Access the Internet using a proxy server Address Port 80 fhttp www google com User Agent requires browser restart Default Windows CE y Cache Size in KB 512 Clear Cache Clear History Optio OK x Internet Options oki x Connection Security Privacy Ad 4 Sect Prey Advanced Pop wee expand ALT text for Anchors navigate on access Browsing Always send URLs as UTF 8 Display a notifica
231. l Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen The touchscreen responds to an actuation force touch of 4 oz or greater of pressure The stylus can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input output device connected to the serial port e Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed e The cursor begins to flash in the field e The unit is ready to accept data from either the physical keypad virtual keyboard or the integrated scanner Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil an abrasive or sharp object to write on the touchscreen E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 38 Entering Data al Using the Scanner Read all cautions warnings and labels before using the laser scanner Do not look into the laser s lens Do not stare directly into the laser beam To scan with the integrated laser barcode reader point the laser aperture towards a barcode and press the Scan button You will see a red laser beam strike the barcode 3er ttl Iz325 o7ago 3 di345 4798 Correct Scan Incorrect Scan Incorrect Scan Figure 1 29 Scan Beam Align the red beam so that the barcode is centered within the beam The laser beam must cross the entire barcode Move the MX8 towards or away from the barcode so that the barcode takes up approximately two thirds
232. le Ctrl v ETB 17 W End Transmission Block Ctrl w CAN 17 X CANcel line Ctrl x EM 19 Y End of Medium Ctrl y SUB la Z SUBstitute Ctrl z VK CONTROL 0x1 1 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down ESC Ib ESCape WM CHAR 0x1b VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down FS Ic N File Separator WM CHAR 0xlc VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x1 1 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down WM CHAR 0x1d down GS ld J Group Separator WM CHAR 0x1d up VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 260 Appendix B Technical Specifications al Char Hex EE Control Action Key VK_CONTROL 0x11 down VK_ SHIFT 0x10 down WM_CHAR 0x36 down RS le we Record Separator WM_CHAR 0x36 up VK_SHIFT up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK SHIFT 0x10 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down US If Unit Separator WM CHAR 0x1f VK PACKET 0xe7 up VK SHIFT 0x10 up VK CONTROL 0x11 up MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A A About software hardware version network IP 80 About LXE software hardware version esse 81 AC External Power Supply How to 16 AC Power Adapter Assembly sse 16 Accessibility settings esses 82 NN 39 Electrostatic Discharge sss 11 A ase netter 11 Activation Key AppLoOock siii emet 12 ActiveSync Back
233. lected that does not exist on the MX6 the data appears to transfer but it is ignored by the MX8 and not loaded When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your PC the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes e connect the mobile device to your PC e setup a partnership so you can synchronize information between your mobile device and your PC and e customize your synchronization settings For more information about using ActiveSync on your PC open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A ActiveSync Get Connected Process 115 Initial Install Initial installation relationship must be established using serial RS232 or USB cable connection between the MX8 and the desktop laptop PC Once a relationship has been established tap a l Help ActiveSync for help Install ActiveSync on Desktop Laptop Go to the Microsoft Windows website ActiveSync Download Install file location www microsoft com downloads and type ActiveSync in the Keywords text box This process should locate the latest version of ActiveSync Install ActiveSync 3 7 or later on the PC before using ActiveSync to connect the PC to the mobile device Follow the instructions in the ActiveSync Wizard Check that 4 Programs Communication ActiveSync Tools Options has the correct connection selected Refer to Serial Connection or USB Connection When installation of ActiveSy
234. lication menu and select the host type that you require This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to i e 3270 mainframe AS 400 5250 server or VT host 3 Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system 4 Update the telnet port number if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port If not just use the default telnet port 5 Select OK 6 Select Session Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Command Bar Upon a successful connection you should see the host application screen displayed To change options such as Display Colors Cursor Barcode etc please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Installing User Certificates and Private Keys 27 al Installing User Certificates and Private Keys A2 It 1s important that all dates are correct on CE and desktop laptop computers when Hd using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not Date Time correct authentication will fail Access A Settings Control Panel Certificates Prerequisites e The MXS has the correct Date and Time See Chapter 3 section titled Date Time e A User Certificate file is available e A Private Key file is available First using ActiveSync copy the User
235. ly the available ports are shown 5 Tap the Configure button 6 Under the Port Settings tab choose the appropriate baud rate Data bits parity and stop bits remain at 8 none and 1 respectively 7 Under the Call Options tab be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone since a direct connection will not have a dial tone Set the timeout parameter default is 5 seconds Tap OK 8 TCP IP Settings should not need to change from defaults Tap the Finish button to create the new connection Close the Remote Networking window 10 To activate the new connection select AY Settings Control Panel PC Connection and tap the Change Connection button 11 Select the new connection Tap OK twice 12 Close the Control Panel window 13 Connect the desktop PC to the mobile device with the appropriate cable 14 Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection You can activate the connection by double tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window but this will only start an RAS Remote Access Services session and does not start ActiveSync properly E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 104 Settings Control Panel Options al Owner Access A Settings Control Panel Owner Icon Set the mobile device owner details Factory Default Settings Identification Name Company Address Telephones Blank Display at power on Disabled Notes Notes Blank
236. m Options The following options represent the factory default program installation Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased Access AY Programs Communication Stores Network communication options ActiveSync Begin ActiveSync connection Connect Run this command after setting up a connection Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Microsoft File Viewers Excel Viewer Image Viewer PDF Viewer Word Viewer Command Prompt Inbox Internet Explorer JAVA LXE RFTerm Media Player Microsoft WordPad Radio Config Utility Remote Desktop Summit Client Transcriber Wavelink Avalanche Windows Explorer Note encrypted Begin connection to FTP server Stop connection with FTP server View downloaded files see Note View Excel documents View BMP JPEG and PNG images View Adobe Acrobat documents View Word and RTF files The command line interface in a separate window Microsoft Outlook mail inbox Access web pages on the world wide internet Option Option Terminal emulation application RFTerm automatically runs as soon as a reboot is completed Music management program Opens an ASCII notepad Radio management program WZC icon in toolbar Displays MX8 file structure on a remote desktop monitor RF client management program See Chapter 5 Handwriting recognition program using an integrated dictionary Option Remote management for networked devices File management program The
237. m in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Control Code Replacement Examples Example Configuration Translation Control Example Translated data Character configuration data Ignore drop The control character is discarded Ignore drop Ox1B in the from the barcode data prefix and barcode is suffix discarded Printable text Text is substituted for Control Start of TeXt STX 0x02 ina Character barcode is converted to the text STX Hat encoded The hat encoded text is translated to Carriage AM Value 0x0d in a text the equivalent hex value Return barcode is converted to the value 0x0d Escaped hat The hat encoding to pass thru to the Horizontal NAP Value 0x09 in a encoded text application Tab barcode is converted to the text P Hex encoded The hex encoded text is translated Carriage 0x0A Value 0x0D in text to the equivalent hex value Return a barcode is converted to a value 0x0A Escaped hex The hex encoding to pass thru to Vertical Tab Ox0A or Value Ox0C is a encoded text the application Q0A barcode is converted to text Ox0A E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 160 Barcode Tab P Barcode Processing Examples The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix suffix configurations The
238. me applications Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode Application Panel Key cesses y L input Panel Figure 6 3 Application Panel Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End user Mode If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed the mobile device reboots into Administrator mode If a password has been set but an application has not been specified the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered Option Explanation Filename Default is blank Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK Title Default is blank Enter the Title to be associated with the application The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique titles in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel Arguments Default is blank Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box Order Default is 1 Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user Applications are launched
239. mit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a warm boot or Suspend Resume to connect using the new profile configuration E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 190 Summit Client Configuration al PEAP GTC Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Summit Client Utility OK x Main Profile status Diags Global Rer ui Profile Default SDC New Rename Delete Scan Radio Encryption wea TKIP y WEP keys PSKs Credentials sedes Cmm Figure 5 23 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP GTC Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to PEAP GTC Set Encryption to WPA TKIP To use Stored Credentials tap the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network CA Cert A Validate server 7 Use MS store L Leom Figure 5 24 PEAP GTC Credentials Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate If using the Windows certificate store Tap the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button Unc
240. my password Figure 5 34 Logon to Certificate Authority This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file Windows CE devices such as the MX8 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate Microsoft Certificat es johndoe Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 35 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Tap the Request a certificate task link MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Certificates 199 P Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Request a Certificate Select the certificate type User Certificate Or submit an advanced certificate request Figure 5 36 Request a Certificate Type Tap on the advanced certificate request l
241. n The first section is the GENERAL section This contains the keymap name all numerics as well as the number of rows and columns in the keymap and the algorithm for converting rows and columns to a data byte to go into the keymap table General MAPDESC Default MAPNAME 00000409 MAPCNT 5 MAPCOLS 10 MAPROWS 8 ALGOR MX8 MAPDESC Name of this map This is what appears in the popup menu in the keyboard control panel MAPNAME ID code of this map for use with the internal Win32 APIs which require a numeric value MAPCNT Gives the number of MAP sections and hence keymap tables in this source file E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 238 Creating Custom Key Maps al MAPCOLS Number of columns in each keymap table This is defined by the hardware keyboard MAPROWS Number of rows in each keymap table This is defined by the hardware keyboard ALGOR Defines the algorithm for converting row column to internal scan code Current values are MX3X MX8 MXS is scancode column lt lt 3 row Note The field MAPDESC needs to be unique but MAPNAME does not SPECIAL Section Not applicable to MX8 Retained in key file for compiler compatibility Special EYSHIFT COL8ROWO EYALT COL9ROWO A A The second section is the SPECIAL section which contains the row and column definitions for certain modifier keys which must be processed independent of the overall keymap
242. n is brought to the foreground The previous application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only When the user needs to use the Input Panel they tap the Keyboard option Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus The switchpad lists user applications as well as the Keyboard option See Also Application Panel Launch Manual Launch and Allow Close Using the Switch Key Sequence One switch key sequence or hotkey is defined by the administrator for the end user to use when switching between locked applications This is known as the Activation key The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter When the switch key sequence 1s pressed on the keypad the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the background End user key presses affect the application in focus only See Also Application Panel Global Key MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Multi Application Configuration 213 al Multi Application Configuration Access AY Settings Control Panel Administration icon The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Note AppLock cannot support multiple windows of so
243. n tap the System icon Flash cards installed by the end user are located in the socket under the main battery pack Files on the end user flash card can be accessed by tapping the Storage Card icon on the desktop CAB files when executed are not deleted ABOUTLXE CAB APICAB SUMMIT CAB BLUETOOTH CAB LXE_MX8_ENABLER CAB RFTERM CAB JAVA CAB APPLOCK CAB The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present Lists installed OS hardware and software versions Opens API files needed for proper operation Summit Client files needed for radio operation See Chapter 5 Summit Bluetooth Client files needed for LXEZ Pairing operation Wavelink Avalanche Enabler RFTerm terminal emulation application Java application AppLock program See Chapter 4 AppLock Note Always perform a warm boot when exchanging one flash card for another Pre formatted SD Flash cards are available from LXE see Accessories If a flash card requires formatting it must be removed from the MX8 before formatting the card to FATI6 MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A 114 ActiveSync Get Connected Process ActiveSync Get Connected Process Introduction Requirement ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher must be on the host desktop laptop PC computer A partnership between a PC and the MX8 must be established using serial RS 232 or USB connection When more than one PC will be synchronizing with the MX8
244. nc is complete on your PC the ActiveSync Setup Wizard on the PC begins and it begins searching for a connected device Because ActiveSync is already installed on your mobile device your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your PC in the ActiveSync wizard and using the USB cable connect your mobile device to the PC Serial Connection Tap the a Settings Control Panel PC Connection on the MX8 Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose COM 1 57600 Note The default is USB LXE does not recommend using serial ActiveSync at 115 Kb s This will set up the MX8 to use COM 1 Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked Tap OK to return to the Control Panel USB Connection Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel PC Connection on the MX Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose USB Default This will set up the MX8 to use the USB configuration Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked Tap OK to return to Settings E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 116 ActiveSync Get Connected Process Connect Initial Install Process Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the MX8 the client Tap the Dd Programs Communication Connect icon on the MX8 The MX8 connection is made using Dd Programs Communication ActiveSyn
245. ndows In order for AppLock to control the application being LOG EX locked so it can prevent the application from exiting AppLock launches the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered Enter DecryptPwd Entering the password decryption process LOG PROCESSING Enter EncryptPwd Entering the password encryption processing LOG PROCESSING Enter FullScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen mode In LOG PROCESSING full screen mode the taskbar is hidden and disabled Enter GetAppInfo Processing is at the beginning of the function that LOG PROCESSING retrieves the application information from the registry Enter password dialog Entering the password dialog processing LOG PROCESSING E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 224 Message Enter password timeout Explanation and or corrective action Entering the password timeout processing Error Messages Pr Level LOG_PROCESSING Enter restart app timer Some application shut down before AppLock can stop it In these cases AppLock gets notification of the exit When the notification is received AppLock starts a timer to restart the application This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function LOG_PROCESSING Enter Taskba
246. ndstrap esses 14 SD card interface estars ei 2 44 SD Cards Install and remove sees 50 EE 143 SE955 laser scanner 47 Second key function described 57 Security Panel AppLockos tocan cido 218 Select A TOME iios nonini i sene test ea 99 Select a key map 99 Send Key Messages and Wedge 145 146 Set Owner information sssseeeeeeene 22 Set Uie A dete 22 Settings Menu Status tabo cui n EDI asii 140 Setup App pL E niente quien dise e 207 Setup new device MXS Reference Guide 266 AppLock ere 208 Setup Software esses 65 Shift key function sse 56 Shortcuts Avalanche initial 136 Show Clock eese 76 Shutdown time limits eese 61 Soft Keyboard sse 96 Software and Files teet be antec 66 Applications esee 67 A teet 66 supported by the MXS ssssssssssss 66 Sounds and Volume default values 112 A apio E eq 47 Speaker location ecccesessecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereees 24 Special functions 56 A cere ene eee eee eee re 171 Standard keys T f Clos neri seassbitaeestigstassienes cues pesao 56 Start Menu Shutdown eese 69 Start Menu described oooooonncccccnonaconionnccononnnaronnass 71 Start Ping onse fecta 174 Startup and shutdown Avalanche iii
247. ng is enabled for all symbologies meaning code IDs will be stripped unless specifically configured otherwise MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data 153 This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the barcode Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button The entry is added to the Match list To remove an entry from the Match list highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button Tap the OK button to store any additions deletions or changes Barcode Data 10 x a ea Figure 4 7 Symbology Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data Match Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written
248. ng to output buffer 12 Adda terminating NUL to the output buffer in case the data 1s processed as a string 13 If key output is enabled start the process to output keys If control characters are encountered e If Translate All is set key is translated to CTRL char and output e If Translate All is not set and key has a valid VK code key is output e Otherwise key is ignored not output The data is ready to be read by applications See Barcode Processing Examples at the end of the Barcode Tab section See Valid VK Codes for CE MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Internal Port 2 Disabled Port 3 Disabled Send key messages WEDGE Enabled Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enabled Use Illumination LEDs Enabled COMI Port external serial port Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Bits 8 Barcode Enable Code ID None Vibration Good Scan Vibration Off Bad Scan Vibration Long Scanner Control ok E Mein com Barcode vibration Port 2 Port 3 0 disabled disabled O com O com 1 O Internal O Internal O output E output Y Send Key Messages WEDGE M Enable Internal Scanner Sound M Use illumination LEDs If Send Key Messages Baud Rate Stop Bits 115200 e 1 57600 2 38400 O 19200 e
249. nge of all paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive Note When an active paired device not the MX6 enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the MX8 Bluetooth scan range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the MX8 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the MXS See Accessories for supported Bluetooth printers and scanners AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using Bluetooth applications nor does it stop authorized Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the MX8 while AppLock is in control See Chapter 6 AppLock for more information See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Bluetooth 33 Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup Introduction Please refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturer s User Guide it may be available on the manufacturer s web site Contact your LXE representative for Bluetooth product assistance LXE supports several different types of barcode readers This section describes the interaction and setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the MX8 using Bluetooth functions e The MX8 must have the Bluetooth hardware and software installed An MX8 operating system upgrade may be required Contact your LXE representative for details e Ifthe MX8 has a Bluetooth address identifier barcode label affixed then Blue
250. nistrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging All All messages are displayed Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 220 Multi Application Configuration al Log Note If a level higher than Error is selected the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is None however to reduce registry use the administrator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry e None default e Error e Processing e Extended e All Save As When the Save As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and filename If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created Troubleshooting AppLo
251. nner Aperture uuu oic eb im RES eee EE NEE NEE E E EE PENA SUR EVE SEO V EEE 39 Power SUPPLY isc nc A A AA A ARA AA AAA A EA 60 Checking Battery Status acia 60 MXS Status LED and th Bateria a 60 Main Battery roli M 60 Battery Hots wap pie m 61 Low Battery Warmi e 61 Back Dat cra 61 Handling Batteries Safely susi aaa 62 Battery Maintenance Public is os 62 MAS Multi Gharger ODEO ci as 63 istis per LBD c Q 63 MAS Cradles OPTION eecs savon ae vea p rca pan E peu FERE Pea E FER e pxa FEES E PER a 64 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 65 epgsie iosire e ceca a 65 bli iz ro DUM a Pee eo oe oer eee eee eee 65 O SON a 66 Software Load cae 66 Sofware Applicati Otis o a 67 Soltwarte Backup a 67 Version C Onteol oci een ee eee 67 Uer T 67 Startup Folders and Launch Sequences in uere n inde 67 Optional Software 5 tero e EH e EH iia 68 AppLock Opti ccc ete eei one ep let UII DEL IH TUN EHE EA NR ee eee 68 Bluetooth Option dai 68 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 6 Table of Contents BANAAN O oeste oe neces a E E I MUSEUM 68 EXE RF lerm TOpLbloH 59 up ren HE E p e Hi emt cette te edi iS 68 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Opio pista daa 68 DSO B nissan eran O A A E E o id A A ii 69 My Deyics Folders ui aaa 70 Start Menu Program OPtIONS rues ecii
252. nnonenne ranma nn ne ne nn nn rana ene nns n nn nnn n 26 Terminal Emulation SOU iei NEEHARRER UR EIE UP Ud RUN ERMEnE RISO NA UU D NR RA AAA 26 Installing User Certificates and Private Keys eeeeeeeeeeeneennenenen nennen nnne nnns 27 User Ceri ea be cr rr RH EHE ERE EE a 27 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 4 Table of Contents Private Keyssnanuciaduce tad e e tec Tm tse to deis rete deti t td ete Htec citta 28 i o E 29 Jin e Ee E RE TI 29 Settings Tab Bluetooth Optio cura teet ict Ee C CORRER ORE 29 Report when connection da dado 30 Report ti Ded ces eet ea EEEE E EA EEEE MEE NA Deo TEER ae pa SEET 30 Report tagline to qECOHBEED 2 roses Ee RES E cocidas 30 Computer as COMME LADS eod ren SERRE PESE ERR IHR CREE Fes eee Sano aiii 30 Computers discaverablgu ilatina to Enea dn DS 30 Prompt devices dequest to DAE ose oet ER RE ERG FERE NER RECIEN R SR HATE DAT RERO ees 30 Continuous Sede cs oceans e ex SE ERE e HERR ERES ORE o e MR U Dr earns S Eme Ext u ERE 30 gt ota LL Ajo CI e o Hades E DU A EUG PECIA aD LA LE DS 31 A A ois paite er SURE dH ttu Eb te RA DU E Re M eet Ebr cte S Papa de PER IRE U ERR M ebd Reed E aside Id 32 Bluetooth Barcode Reader SIA smi pecie tra SOR ERR rer Es En RRERAE ERES EE EE Ra TR HER ORE XR EM Toe AE Led RR MK E 33 e eu I IC UM MU M MEE 33 MXS wim Label cd a a HE RE EE HH Ee Mrigetes Ld uta A 34 MX S withopt Dabel i eu rtr a Ha ted HUS DU AER
253. npn true ne etta ux ue een a a iaa ed A 71 COMUNA suena t OS EX PRESE cant one HR CEU ERR I HRS ERE E acta pato uisa it esame ele E E E 12 GUI cu MR PM 32 ME OPIS up cu canc M E MM ET T 32 Start Stop ALSINA pr EE 72 SU CT oo A eT e MILL I De EIUS 73 OI ee M uM E MM IMEEM M E 73 Wireless Zero Conte Utility and the Summit Cent uio raeertn Rte Phi et rx Re epp tkt ke S ERES aiae eE ERE HR HAE Du RU 73 Command Prompt ues A EUR e RR En un en EA peu Ghia una A Rep a URN PR Ge ENT QUAE ER AER eR LOS 74 jui euet e RD TE 74 Internet Explota EE Ide D debe ut demere dieit te dide hub dde t M Ud 74 Media Playera RP e P d de e ticis n uv deer d nite be dile bit ded edd T3 Mictosott WordPad sesei ea EH E EA eee T3 beri M ER LEE 76 Windows Explotet ine rete aate nite be uds Mute p n dedu uto fv EE Ud 76 Takt acce ERE E GEM e a eDE Hone ea cM e oH Get CLEe na 76 Advanced AD aiio oot uet diti eaaet erui a Ue edt tr I e IM C Idi tard T Settings Control Panel OptioNS uiii rain cena Eta thkcrda Cha ai ra b A rr 78 ASDDUULU ea aiebat deb MoEbHd et pne IUIS A 80 POD OU XE sie tec DM BH REN EEUU HU Hd ted E A 81 Accessibility ene EU did 82 Administration For AppLOck iino ne hit t dvi ni i eit a ids i v o pasajes 82 irj ETE 83 EINOLA er ROHU DEI REM NEHME IE E S 84 DISCON gu 85 Bluetooth DIC ope p ERHESEHRGNU EU EGER HI HIE M mM uH Ne HII 86 Bluetooth Device Proper adi 87 Ioni mr M
254. nues to monitor the Mobile Device Server for updates once the Enabler application is exited MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 135 al Scan Config Tab Avalanche Update Settings OK E Startup Shutdown Scan Config pi 1 Run Scan Wedge A Note Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Close Scan Wedae on Exil x amp ad Wavelink Avalanche System but is not currently Enabler Scan Not Present supported by LXE on Windows CE devices Scan Config is Enabled Figure 3 44 Avalanche Enabler Scan Config Option Display Tab Avala pdate e q Ol x Scan Config Display shortcuts c Lr Update Window Display At startup alf Screen On connect As is v Normal Asis v Figure 3 45 Avalanche Enabler Window Display Options The user interface Update Window Display for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the connection with the Mobile Device Server At startup Half screen Hidden or Full screen Default is Half screen On connect As is Half screen full screen Locked full screen Default is As is Normal Half screen Hidden or As is Default is As is E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 136 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration al Shortcuts Tab LXE recommends using AppLock for this function AppLock is resident on each LXE mobile device with a Windows OS Avalanche U
255. o import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store 7 Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked 8 The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate 9 ForEAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button 10 If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning input the PAC filename and password 11 Tap the OK button then the Commit button 12 Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is properly configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 180 Summit Client Configuration al Note More details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials the authentication will fail No error message is displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials How to Use Sign On Screen 1 After completing the other entries in the profile tap the Credentials button Leave the Username and Password blank No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or WPA LEAP 2 For PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP T
256. ocked The MX8 battery recharging is managed by the power management configuration in the docked MX8 The MX8 can be either On or in Suspend Mode while in the cradles Special purpose and power cables are available from LXE Wireless host client communications can occur whether the cradle is receiving external power or not as wireless functions draw power from the main battery in the MX8 The cradles are designed to secure an MX8 with or without a protective boot a handstrap and or a trigger handle Note The MX8 AC Power Adapters MXSA30ICRDLPSAC and MX8A302CRDLPSACWW are only intended for use with the MX8 multi purpose cables and the MX8 Desktop Cradle The MX8 Passive Vehicle Cradle does not have connectors that can accept an external power source or tethered scanner It is designed to secure the MX8 in a vehicle Please refer to the MX8 Cradle Reference Guide for installation technical A A specifications and user instruction MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Chapter 3 System Configuration Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the MX8 Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the mobile device The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only because the configuration of your specific MX8 may vary The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the M
257. ome confusion when re establishing partnerships with hosts ActiveSync Troubleshooting ActiveSync on the host returns to the Get Connected screen without connecting to the cabled device If the MX8 is connected to a PC by a cable disconnect the cable from the MX8 and reconnect it again Check that the correct connection is selected Serial or USB Client if this is the initial ActiveSync installation See Also Cold Boot and Loss of Host Reconnection ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect but it cannot identify it One or more control lines are not connected This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port Try the following to re establish the connection On the Host desktop or laptop PC 1 Open ActiveSync 2 Select File Connection Settings and disable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port 3 Click OK 4 Select File Connection Settings and enable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port On the MX8 Tap Start Programs Communication Connect to establish an ActiveSync connection to the host ActiveSync indicator on the host disc in the toolbar tray turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable before tapping the Connect icon One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indi
258. on No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User name and Password when connecting to the network If the username and password are left blank during setup see Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 192 Summit Client Configuration al Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate User User Cert User Cert pwd CA Cert E Validate server 7 Use MS store Cancel Figure 5 26 EAP TLS Credentials Dialog If using the Windows certificate store Tap the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox Select the desired certificate and tap Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Tap OK then tap Commit For information on generating a Root CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter Perform a Warm Boot or Suspend Resume function to connect using the new profile configuration The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP TLS for the user authentication See Also Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter 1f the username and
259. on al 3 When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox 4 Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert textbox Tap OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes a No Security Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Profile tab Main Profle status Diags Global E Default v E Radio Bit Rate a fopen m Radio Mode Encryption EAP Type None y None y WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Figure 5 11 Configure a Summit Profile with No Security Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to None Set Encryption to None Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a Suspend Resume function to connect using the new profile configuration Note LXE recommends performing a Suspend Resume function each time the Commit button is tapped MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Summit Client Configuration 183 al WEP Keys Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network WEP key requirements To connect using WEP use the following minimum required profile options e Auth Type Open e EAP Type None e Encrypt
260. onononononoconnnconnoconnnonnocnnnnnos 47 Volume Mixer coccocooccoonnconnnconnnononoconononncccnnnnononoconoss 101 W Wake the device from Suspend 69 Warm Boot ooooocccnococcconononononnncnonononononononcnonnnonnnnnncnnns 48 Warning Low Battery eee nea nen ee tee reper 61 Warnings and Labels Laser SCanmet cccccceccceeesssssceceeeceessnseeeeeeeeeenes 38 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation 125 Wed o eO 145 146 Wein hts cocoa ena area 253 WEP Keys Summit ener entren 183 When to use this guide sees 3 Where is the sesssessee 24 48 Where is the c oooconocccoconononcconnnonnncnnnonnncconnnonnnccnnos 38 Where 18 the inier rtr 43 Windows CE on line Help 65 124 Windows Explorer sseeseeeeennn 76 Windows OS version ccoooccconncoonncononooncccnnocononcconoss 111 Wireless communication esee 64 Wireless network configuration 165 Wireless Security Summit Client rre rem 179 Wireless Zero Config Utility Summit Client eese 73 193 WLAN NetWolKS ocooccooocconncconnnonnncconocooncccnnncnnnncinos 26 WLAN Profiles iier se 26 WordPad ec eere ise 75 WPA LEAP Authentication Summit 188 WPA PSK Authentication Summit 189 WZC COM aida 73 193 MXS Reference Guide 268 Index al
261. or Messages Most error messages will specify the line within the keymap source file where the error occurred Duplicate key A COLxROWX code was found in a MAP table but that COL ROW already has a value assigned GENERAL section must come before MAP The GENERAL section must come first or at least before any MAP sections The GENERAL section defines parameters which are needed to process Maps Header line missing close bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name Header line missing open bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 240 Creating Custom Key Maps al Invalid ACTION code s The key scan code is specified as ACTION code but the ACTION code parsed is not recognized The following value is valid SCANI Invalid keycode s The keycode parsed is not recognized The following values are valid e VK code from the VK code table below e x where x is an ASCII code e g A or e OPEN for unused entries will not do anything when pressed Invalid MAP value s The MAP value parsed is not one the following list MAP NORMAL MAP 2ND MAP SHIFT MAP 2NDSHF MAP 2NDSHIFT MAP VOLUM MAP VOLUME MAP CONTR MAP CONTRAST MAP BRITE or MAP BRIGHT Invalid MAPCNT 1 d valid The specified MAPCNT exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler Invalid MAPCOLS 1 d valid The specified MAPCOLS exc
262. oth Device Disconnect Delle iii dia 87 Bluctooth Device Properties Mem n dri inicial dd as Ho Ges pe td oer 87 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel nic tr tb d danna 88 Bluetooth bout Panel aee cort E rrt b RE WWE VR dE 89 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 12 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Table of Contents Dial 1 3 de deett ud iba ES ao 94 Display Properties aaa pala E he i Pa use ERO UE ye REO RU e 95 Taput Panel isa naaa EHE ga I TOR ec T a verb lit 96 Intemet Options uomen t E rettet ga OP T OPEP uve EBENE HP ge CE REN 97 Keyboard Propet Siar uere n pn vet EO ade 99 M ppable R65 dsc 100 MA niu enims eR adipem ea M xn las erm IM IE EE MAE 101 Monse Properts aid 102 Network a d Dialup Condech OS criadas 103 A cse oro tb gu eta eite ORn eade REEE eee SU Ru cud e seva ce Len
263. out Exiting password timeout processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit restart app timer Processing is at the end of the timer function LOG_PROCESSING Exit TaskbarScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToAdmin Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into LOG_PROCESSING admin mode Exit ToUser Exiting the user mode switch function LOG_PROCESSING MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Error Messages Message Exit ToUser Registry read failure Explanation and or corrective action The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be entered 225 d Level LOG PROCESSING Exit verify password no pwd set Exiting password verification LOG PROCESSING Exit verify password response from dialog Exiting password verification LOG PROCESSING Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode LOG PROCESSING Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook LOG PROCESSING Getting configuration from registry The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode The registry must be re read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the
264. ovco desrption tions of this software are EXE MX8 sed on NCSA Mosaic NCSA losaic was developed by the lational Center for rbana Champaign Distributed El Figure 3 36 System Properties General Tab System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system Hence a system with 128 MB may only report 99 MB memory since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash used for storage E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 112 Memory Tab Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the MX8 is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Device Name Tab The device name and description can be changed Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Copyrights Tab This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot
265. p via ActiveSync Version Control Boot Loader Version numbers are applied to the boot loader and the OS image independently The version information stored consists of the LXE build number plus the date and time of compile in lieu of a build number These version numbers are stored in non volatile storage where the user cannot inadvertently modify them A control panel and API is provided so the user can reference the version numbers for support purposes The MXS has a unique 128 bit ID code as required by the CE 5 0 specification This ID number is generated by the boot loader This ID code is available in the control panel and via a Win32 standard API In addition an API is provided to return a standard LXE copyright string so that applications may reference this to be sure they are running on an LXE mobile device for licensing purposes See Accessories for the LXE MX8 SDK Kit part number The MXS supports a proprietary boot loader It is the responsibility of the boot loader to e Initialize all system hardware e Initiate OS startup e Handle wakeup from system suspend loading saved state The MXS starts the OS every time during warm boot or cold boot Startup Folders and Launch Sequences The MX8 operating system uses two startup folders e User applications placed in the Windows Startup folder automatically run during a warm boot They are deleted upon a cold boot e User applications placed in the System Startup
266. pdate Settings OK E Figure 3 46 Avalanche Enabler Application Shortcuts Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel This limits the user s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display LXE recommends using AppLock for this function See Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 137 Adapters Tab Note LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet Avalanche Update Settings jok E Display Shortcuts Adapters stat 4 Current Adapter Primary adapter M Icon on taskbar 6 Use Avalanche Network Profile fa O Use Manual Settings Figure 3 47 Avalanche Enabler Adapters Options Network Manage Network Setting When enabled the Enabler will control the network settings This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is enabled by default Manage Wireless When enabled the Enabler will control the wireless settings This Settings parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Management Console and is disabled by default This parameter setting does not apply to Summit Clients only Current Adapter List
267. pe of ID specified in the Barcode tab Enable Code ID field AIM or Symbol plus any custom identifiers When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode data if the symbology is disabled the barcode is rejected Otherwise the other settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed If the symbology is disabled all other fields on this dialog are grayed When there are no customized settings and the Enable checkbox is unchecked All is selected and no other settings are customized a confirmation dialog is presented to the user You are about to disable all scan input Is this what you want to do Tap the Yes button or the No button Tap the X button to close the dialog without making a decision If there are customized settings uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones Min This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data not including Code ID must meet to be processed Any barcode scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected The default for this field is 1 This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data not including Code ID can be to be processed Any barcode scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected The default for this field is All 9999 If the value entered is greater than t
268. pecifically configured See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix B Technical Specifications Note Non ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option Non ASCII equivalent keys include the function keys e g lt F1 gt arrow keys Page up Page down Home and End E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 156 Barcode Tab Barcode Ctrl Char Mapping See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in barcodes Control characters can be replaced with user defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values In key message mode control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences Control Character OK ES Translate All Control Character Replacement ACKnowledge Ignore drop Carriage Return OxOD End of Text aM Character Form Feed y Replacement AMA Assign Delete Figure 4 9 Barcode Tab Ctrl Char Mapping See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart at the end of Appendix B Technical Specifications MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab Translate All 157 When Translate All is checked unprintable ASCII characters characters below 20H in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropria
269. pen L9ROW4 open L9ROW5 open L9ROW6 open CO L9ROW7 open Creating Custom Key Maps al MA the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys with only SHIFT Map P MAP ORANG CLLEGE Eng Wr CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CATE RARA CRTE CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO cot CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CLEAN col CO CO L3ROW1 open L3ROW2 open L3ROW3 open L3ROW4 open L3ROW5 open L3ROW6 open L3ROW7 open L4ROW1 open L4ROW2 open LIROWO0 open L1ROW1 open L1ROW2 open L1ROW3 open L1ROW4 open L1ROW5 open L1ROW6 open L1ROW7 open L3ROWO0 open LA4ROWO open CO MXS Reference Guide L4ROW3 open CREE CUEOL OL ULT LOROWO VK F23 LOROW1 VK_F22 LOROW2 VK_F21 LOROW3 open LOROW4 open LOROW5 open LOROW6 open LOROW7 open KE d wor EC LLE OT L2ROWO VK F24 L2ROW1 open L2ROW2 open L2ROW3 open L2ROW4 open L2ROW5 open L2ROW6 open L2ROW7 open E EQ MX8RG A Creating Custom Key Maps Output File E EQ MX8RG A COL4ROW4 open COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 open COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open CIERRA E TARA AAA COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 open COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 open COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 open COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 op
270. port settings sss 147 Command Prompt sse 74 Commit button Global sess 175 Profile EIER n 170 Components c ep reete erster o ien 5 Computer Friendly Name esee 89 Connect IN ener 72 Connect External PS sess 16 Connect Using essere 106 Connection IA 131 Contact LX Elsa a 39 Control Char mapping esee 148 Control characters 157 Control Panel options eene 78 Controls Physicals insirri 48 Copyrights ni er eH TRE Red 112 Core LOGIC isd canine Ra ai 43 CPU nasa inca 253 CPU Xsc le iia a 43 Create a dialup direct or VPN connection 103 Create Connection option sse 103 Ctrl Char Mapping sse 156 Ctrl key functions 4i encender 56 Cumulative mode timers sessssesss 107 Current Tie ieies iosi eeii ainai 93 Custom identifier pter eius 148 Custom Identifiers esses 158 Custom Key Mapping sse 236 Custom parameter option sse 175 Customize dates times currency sss 108 D Dala Bits oce reto dede E ORT 143 Data entry A nien eem etie 36 EA ee ceeeeceseeecnceeeceseeeeeseeateneeneeseeneees 38 SE TUS iin eia ioter ses rec te etel nets Sni iR 37 virtual keyboard ssesssssee 36 Data CIty M 36 Date and Time default settings ssusu 93
271. power Blinking Green Display Off No user intervention required No Color Good No user intervention required Scan Status The Scan Status LED is located below the MX8 keypad When the Scan Status LED is The Status is Steady Green Good Scan Steady Red Scan in Progress Amber iid engine is being accessed by the Scanner No Color Scanner Imager ready for use Alpha Mode Alph Key The Alpha Mode LED is located beside the F5 key When the Alph LED is The Status is Steady Green Device is in Alpha character input mode No Color Device is in Numeric key input mode E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 56 The Keypad Cd Standard Keys See Appendix A Key Maps The integrated scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed or when the m scan trigger is pressed on the optional trigger handle The Enter key is used to confirm a forms entry or to transmit information How it pu is used is determined by the application running on the mobile device The Diamond key s can be programmed to duplicate a single key press as Diamond defined by Windows CE with the exception of the Shift Alt and Ctrl Ctl keys Refer to the Mappable Diamond Keys section for instruction Numeric The number keys are used to add numbers to data entry fields Alpha The alpha keys are used to add letters and characters to data entry fields
272. r Then click the Disconnect button IMPORTANT Do not put the MX8 into suspend while connected via USB The MX8 will be unable to connect to the host PC when it resumes operation Radio Connection e Put the MX8 into Suspend Mode by tapping the red Power button e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status bar Then click the Disconnect button MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A ActiveSync Get Connected Process 119 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a mobile device and a PC A partnership is defined by two objects a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created An ActiveSync partnership for a unique client can be established to two hosts If the MX8 is cold booted the random number is deleted and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name Re Settings Control Panel System Device Name If the cold booted MXS tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC a new random number is generated for the MX8 and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the MX8 be changed If the MX8 is associated with a second host changing the name will destroy that partnership as well This can cause s
273. r and the connection for tightness If the handle gets worn or damaged it must be replaced If the pistol grip connection loosens it must be tightened before the MX8 is placed in service E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 14 Hardware Setup p Installing the Handstrap Note The handstrap cannot be used installed when the MX8 has the trigger handle installed at the same time An elastic hand strap is available for the MX8 Once installed the handstrap provides a means for the user to secure the computer to their hand It is adjustable to fit practically any size hand and is easily moved to allow installation or removal of the battery pack Note Loosen the top strap of the handstrap to allow access to the battery well Figure 1 11 MX8 Handstrap 1 Handstrap Retainer Bracket 2 Handstrap and tethered stylus 3 Handstrap Clip Tool Required 1 Phillips Screwdriver not supplied by LXE Installation Place the MX8 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface 2 Attach the handstrap retainer bracket to the MX8 with the screws provided 3 Slip the Handstrap Clip into the bracket at the base of the MX8 4 Making sure the closed loop fastener surfaces on the handstrap are facing up slide the strap through the pin in the retainer bracket and the clip 5 Fold each end of the the strap over so that the closed loop fastener surfaces mate evenly 6 Test the strap s connection making sure the MX8 is securely connected
274. r network LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to manage wireless connectivity eee To use Wireless Zero Config first open the Summit Client Utility Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down box A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly Tap OK Tap the Power button to place the MX8 in Suspend then tap the Power button again to wake the MX8 from Suspend mode The Wireless Zero Config utility begins See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for instruction and complete information E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 74 Start Menu Program Options d Command Prompt Access A Programs Command Prompt File Edit Help Pocket CMD v 5 0 gt Figure 3 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File Close Inbox Access A Programs Inbox This option requires a connection to a mail server There are a few changes in the CE version of Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options Tap the button to access Inbox Help ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the MX8 inbox and a PC s desktop inbox Refer to ActiveSync Processes in this guide Internet Explorer Access A Programs Internet Explorer The default start page is www lxe com and the default
275. rScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen to non full screen mode and enable the taskbar LOG_PROCESSING Enter ToAdmin Entering the function that handles a mode switch into LOG_PROCESSING admin mode Enter ToUser Entering the function that handles the mode switch to LOG_PROCESSING user mode Enter verify password Entering the password verification processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows Found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumeration function found the application LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows Not found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumeration function did not find the application LOG_PROCESSING Exit DecryptPwd Exiting password decryption processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit EncryptPwd Exiting password encryption processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit FullScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen to full LOG_PROCESSING screen Exit GetAppInfo Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the LOG_PROCESSING application information from the registry Exit password dialog Exiting password prompt processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog cancel Exiting password prompt w cancel LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog OK Exiting password prompt successfully LOG_PROCESSING Exit password time
276. reen and all peripherals function normally e the display backlight is on until the Backlight timer expires then it dims The MX8 After a new MX has been received a charged main battery inserted and the Power key tapped the MXS is always active until both batteries are drained completely of power When the main battery and backup battery are drained completely the unit is in the Off mode The unit transitions from the Off mode to the On mode when a charged main battery is inserted or external power is applied and the Power key is pressed E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 52 Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing Suspend Mode The MX8 Off Mode The Suspend mode is entered when the unit is inactive for a predetermined period of time or the user taps the Power key MX8 Suspend timers are set using a Settings Control Panel Power Schemes tab A Power key tap wakes the unit and resets the display backlight timers Wake up sources can be configured by the administrator e g any key press a trigger press a touchscreen tap AC adapter insert USB cable insert or Serial cable CTS will also wake the unit and reset the display backlight timers When the unit wakes up the Display Backlight and the Power Off timers begin the countdown again The MX8 should be placed in Suspend mode before hot swapping the main battery The unit is in Off Mode when the main battery and the backup battery are depleted Insert a fully charged main battery
277. registry Create a new string value under this key The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 82 Settings Control Panel Options al Accessibility Access A Settings Control Panel Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sounds function There are a few changes from general desktop Accessibility options Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Accessibility Keyboard sound Display Mouse StickyKeys h Use StickyKeys if you Cat want to use Shift Ctrl A or Alt key by pressing one key at a time O use stickyKeys ToggleKeys Use ToggleKeys if you CAS want to hear tones when pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock Use Togalekeys Settings Figure 3 6 System Accessibility The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system e Ifthe ToggleKeys option is selected please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do e Ifthe SoundSentry option is selection please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do Administration For AppLock Access A Settings Cont
278. rge Only Multi Interface requires data cable and 8800A004CRADLEVCMI power supply US AC Power Cord use with 88004301 ACPS and 8800A05IPOWERCORD 8800A379CHGRBASE Universal Desktop Power Supply 90 264VAC 9VDC 2A EPS 8800A301ACPS 9 60VDC Forklift Power Supply For Use with Forklift Cradles 8800A302DCPS Power Cable Connects DC Power Supply to Forklift Cradle 8800A052DCPWRCABLE Forklift Rugged Scanner Holder with RAM mount all metal with cloth 8800A005STAND padding MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Hardware Configuration System Hardware The MX8 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure AA Figure 2 1 System Hardware Central Processing Unit The LXE MX8 CPU is a 520MHz Intel Xscale PXA27X CPU The operating system is Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 The OS image is stored on an internal flash memory and is loaded into DRAM for execution The Xscale turbo mode switching is supported and turned on by default Core Logic The MX8 supports the following I O components of the core logic e One Mini SD card slot under the main battery pack e One serial port e One Digitizer Input port Touchscreen E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 44 Hardware Configuration System Memory The 520MHz CPU configuration supports 128 MB Strata Flash 128MB SDRAM The system optimizes for the amount of SDRAM available The operating system executes out of RAM Int
279. river expects that the setting has been programmed into the scanner externally and that the data will be coming in with the specified Code ID attached Transmission of the Code ID 1s enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies not for an individual symbology Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate between symbologies Options None Programs the internal scanner to disable transmission of a Code ID The only entry in the Symbology popup list is All AIM Programs the internal scanner to transmit the AIM ID with each barcode The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom code IDs Symbol Programs the internal scanner to transmit the Symbol ID with each barcode The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom Code IDs Note The Symbol entry may not appear on mobile devices with integrated imagers e g EV 15 Imager Custom Does not change the scanner s Code ID transmission setting The combo box in the Symbology control panel is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs Notes E EQ MX8RG A When Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is not enabled the code ID is sent as part of the barcode data to an application When Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is enabled the entire Code ID string
280. roduct can be recycled reclaimed and re used when properly discarded Do not discard labeled units with trash For information about proper disposal contact LXE through your local sales representative or visit www lxe com Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 A AP aa aan ee need mtn aidan tee dd ele nce anaat ee ana am meagan eemneeocuane meena eee ee menace 1 COMIC CS esteso nid EDD it pado dedi E E cc dotado etico ced taicpete ui tpdeidbs 2 Important Battery Informatica 3 Whento Use This Guide cinto cl paa 3 Document Convention Srakane e EE PM RR A a uiua titt dn cial 4 COMPONGINGS siii rra LEEREN CAE AEKEEA CE HAE AERE Rd AERE ANA A A AO ARANA aa AA 5 A td de HR HU ces eda e R iei toute dotate ID Lie itus 3 e 6 Scanner Imager Aperture onde HOHER UE Din Ee Ue Mees D HDI REEL J Trigger Handle ninel a a R E E ida adi ici I Handstr p aieo pei eit ai ted RI e C EE N 8 TO Por and Cables ccoo 9 MXS ACA 10 QUICK SEE morro E E E EA T A R 11 Trouble EE 12 Related Manuals Tor SR 12 Entering the AppLock Activation as 12 Hote Yonenn O Hose tice mseneacoeenuaeemenreunsee 12 IU 12 ari A EEA 13 Installing Trigger Handle OPtona ljos oeer ereere EEEN ss 13 Tastalline the Hands tp nario 14 Inserting a Fully Charged Ballard rare 15 A EUR EH EDU RE Ee Teeri ER EROR EFREE ER ERE PERTH aS HORDE ever farcry rere e reer 15 Connecting an External Power Supply Optional ccsccossssscsoesenscosssnsssnsestsessesssesssess
281. rol Panel Administration Use this option to set parameters for mobile devices intended to be used as dedicated single or multiple application devices In other words only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the end user See Chapter 4 AppLock for information and instruction C Interne Menu M Status an Global Key ctrt spa y M Input Panel APLCKPNET2Cd Figure 3 7 Administration For AppLock LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to start up in Administration mode with no default password and when the device is started for the first time the user has full access to the MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options Battery E EQ MX8RG A 83 mobile device and no password prompt is displayed After the Administrator specifies an application or applications to lock assigns a password and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the mobile device is then in end user mode AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator AY Settings Control Panel Battery View the status of the Main and Backup batteries Main Battery Voltage 4 179 V Power Remaining 100 BackUp Battery Voltage 2 758 Y Power Remaining 100 Status JACKED Main Battery Charging BackUp Battery High Figure 3 8 System Battery The Battery tab show
282. rty cookies Accept Third party cookies Prompt Session cookies Always allow Advanced Stylesheets Enable Theming Support Enable Multimedia All options enabled Security All options enabled Popups Block popups Disabled Display notification Enabled Use same window Disabled E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options Access A Settings Control Panel Keyboard Icon Set keypad key map and keypad key repeat delay and key repeat rate Tap here and hold down a key to a S Keyboar 32 9 6 45 AM Keyboard Properties lok x Repeat Key map Default MX8 v test a Ae Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key map Default MX8 Figure 3 24 Keyboard Properties Select a key map using the drop down list Adjust the character repeat settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Tap the X box to ignore changes Tap the box for Help The changes take effect immediately When new key maps or fonts are added to the registry they appear in the Key map dropdown list on the Keyboard Properties panel Only one font at a time can be selected The fonts affect the screen display These values do not affect virtual onscreen keyboard key taps Keymaps and Fonts Please contact your LXE representative about the availability of these fonts for your MX8 Descriptive name Simplified Chinese Traditional C
283. s all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device Primary Adapter Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter active only if there are multiple network adapters Icon on taskbar Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may optionally override the standard Windows taskbar E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 138 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Use Avalanche The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Network Profile Avalanche Mobility Center Console Use Avalanche Network Profile El Avalanche Icon Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network ES Profile tab which will display current network settings Profile Property ManageNetwork no ManageWireless no Figure 3 48 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed Use Manual Settings When enabled the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and use only the network settings on the mobile device Properties Icon Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet From here the user can configure Network DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown below Note A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration N
284. s not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified otherwise it just locks it LOG EX Unable to move desktop The desktop is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues LOG ERROR Unable to move taskbar The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues LOG ERROR Unhook taskbar wndproc failure AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar This error does not affect AppLock processing LOG ERROR E nhook wndproc failure AppLock could not remove the hook that allows monitoring of the application LOG_ERROR a nhooking taskbar In administration mode the taskbar should return to normal operation so AppLock s control of the taskbar should be removed LOG EX Unhooking wndproc When the administrator leaves user mode the device is fully operational therefore AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application LOG EX WM SIZE adjusted This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the window size LOG EX MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A AppLock Registry Settings
285. s the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery It also shows the status of the backup battery The listed values cannot be changed by the user LXE recommends Discharging and Recharging the backup battery twice a year MXS Reference Guide ga 84 Settings Control Panel Options al Bluetooth Access A Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices Factory Default Settings Discovered Devices None Settings Turn Off Bluetooth Enabled Report when connection lost Enabled Report when connected Disabled Report failure to reconnect Enabled Computer is connectable Enabled Computer is discoverable Disabled Prompt if devices request to pair Disabled Continuous search Disabled Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered pair connect and disconnect There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the mobile device Figure 3 9 LXEZ Pairing Control Panel e The default Bluetooth setting is On e The MX8 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is discoverable option is disabled unchecked on the Settings panel e Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up to be Non Discoverable or Invisible e The mobile device can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer e Paired sc
286. se EIE 211 At Power On annexe O EAEE REOR Eten 105 Passwords AppLock Save As eeeeeeee 220 Passwords lost at cold boot 124 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication Summit 186 Pen Stylus and d ta entry a c uec eene ite Pen Stylus Pressure limit Permanent storage of drivers and utilities 113 Physical Specifications ssssssss 253 Pin 9 power unavailable sss 143 Pistol Grip Handle sss 13 Power key earned 48 Power key location ssseeeeeene 20 Power Mode Properties sss 107 Power Modes entere peers 51 Power Off Schemes iere ones epe 23 Power Port 1 while asleep sessss 145 Power Supply Battery Pack 45 Prefix and Suffix Control suus 155 Pre loaded Files ovina ina 66 Private key install esee 28 Processor speed eene eret 43 PLOCESSOF YPE AA 111 Profile DUttONS ui 170 Profile parameters SUM dui ts 171 Programmable Keys see 54 Prompt Command A AAA 74 Proprietary boot loader ses 67 Protective Film uie entr ea 25 Putting it all Together sss 13 0 Quick Start Instructions ooocoonnonccconnnoonncconononnnonnss 11 R Reboot How to eene 48 Recalibrati0N ocoooocnnnncccononiccnononcccnnnonnnronnnncnrnnnnnos 110
287. se configuration options the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions Administrator default values for this device Administrator Hotkey Shift Ctrl A Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes The single application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations such as close X icon File Exit File Close Alt F4 Alt Tab etc are disabled The Windows CE desktop icons menu bars task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible Task Manager is not available If the end user selects File Exit or Close from the applications menu bar the menu is cleared and nothing else happens the application remains active Nothing happens when the end user taps on the Close icon on the application s title bar and the application remains active Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts t
288. search page is www google com See section titled Internet Options later in this chapter for Internet Explorer settings Internet Explorer requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider to access the Internet There are a few changes in the CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Select View Options to setup General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popup options when connecting to the Internet Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Start Menu Program Options 75 Media Player Access a Programs Media Player There are few changes in the CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options Select View Options to setup Buffering Playback and Media Network Share options when connecting to the Internet This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider Tap the button to access Media Player Help Microsoft WordPad Access AY Programs Microsoft WordPad Create and edit documents and templates in WordPad using buttons and menu commands that are similar to those used in the desktop PC version of Microsoft Word By default WordPad files are saved as PWD files Documents can be saved in other formats e g RTF or DOC Tap the button to access WordPad Help E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 76
289. settings can be adjusted by the user Shortcuts Add delete and update shortcuts to user allowable applications Adapters Enable or disable network and wireless settings Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings Status View the current adapter signal strength and quality IP address MAC address SSID BSSID and Link speed The user cannot edit this information MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 131 Connection Tab Avalanche Update Settings OK E3 Connection Execution server con Avalanche Server Address V Check serial connection Disable ActiveSync Figure 3 40 Avalanche Enabler Connection Options Avalanche Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server Server Address assigned to the mobile device Check Serial Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port Connection connection to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to the Mobile Device Server Disable Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server ActiveSync E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 132 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration al Execution Tab Note the dimmed options on this panel This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup Unavailable in this release LXE recommends using AppLock S
290. ss updates Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile Device Server E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 134 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration al Startup Shutdown Tab LXE recommends using AppLock for this function AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6 AppLock Avalanche Update Settings OK E Startup Shutdown scan Config oal Program Startup Do not monitor or launch Enabler e O Hide Program Shutdown e Continue monitoring O Stop monitoring Figure 3 43 Avalanche Enabler Startup Shutdown Options Do not monitor or launch When the device boots do not launch the Enabler application Enabler and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server Monitor for updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application Monitor and launch Enabler Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Launch the Enabler application Manage Taskbar Lock or Note the dimmed options The Enabler can restrict user access Hide to other applications when the user interface 1s accessed by either locking or hiding the taskbar Program Shutdown Continue The system administrator can control whether the Enabler or Stop monitoring conti
291. sssssseeeeeennenns 19 Headset and microphone ssss 19 RS232 connection sssssssseeeenee 18 USB connection esses 17 assign key sequences to Diamond keys 100 Audible verification signals sssss 47 Audio Cable Tata ii E 19 audio CODECS nsis einne centres 47 Audio headset interface ooocooncnnoniccnconononcnnncnnncnnoo 46 Audio support 47 Audio Volume settings sse 24 Audio Microphone Connector susse 254 WIDTH 76 Auto reconnect Bluetooth sess 90 Autorun files at startup ooooonoonncnncnnocnnonononconnconnnn noo 71 Avalanche Enabler installation 125 Avalanche update settings esses 130 B Background and Window colors 95 Backlight display timer esses 22 Backlight properties 95 Backlight timers sssseeeeenees 95 Backup Battery oT 60 Nickel Metal Hydride sssssss 45 Time Litas int 61 Backup Data Files sse 117 Backup software orasidin neia 67 Barcode Enable or Disable sssssssess 148 Barcode Symbology Settings 150 Barcode Data Match list sss 153 Barcode processing overview sss 144 Barcode Tab eso tus o ires 148 A ea es tide p
292. t the Enabler searches for a Mobile Device Server first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche Mobility Center Manager is LXE_MX8 The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COMI COM2 and COM3 Agent not found will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a serial port is not present or available COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet in the Control Panel The wireless connection is made using the default client interface on the mobile device therefore the device must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed If a Mobile Device Server is found the Enabler will automatically attempt to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile When configured to download available packages the Enabler will also automatically download and process all available packages MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 127 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established the Enabler will attempt to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Mobility
293. t immediate medical attention NiMH and Li Ion batteries are capable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry metal surfaces conductive tools etc making the objects very hot Never place a battery in a pocket or case with keys coins or other metal objects Battery Maintenance Publication The LXE publication Getting the Most from Your Batteries is available on the LXE Manuals CD and is a single source guide to battery management The publication contains information about battery recharging conditioning and other pertinent issues MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Multi Charger Optional 63 MX8 Multi Charger Optional Please refer to the MX8 Multi Charger User s Guide The multi charger requires an external power source before battery pack charging can commence The battery pack begins to recharge as soon as it is placed in the battery well There are four Charging bays The external AC power supply cable connection for the multi charger is shipped with the multi charger The multi charger AC adapter and cable is only compatible with the MX8 multi charger The main battery pack can be charged in either 1 a powered MX8 Multi Charger or 2 by a powered AC Adapter connected by multipurpose cables to the mobile device Insert the main battery into any charging well in the Multi Charger Remove the battery pack by pulling the bat
294. t the Desktop image and set the display keypad backlight timers when on battery or external power Factory Default Settings Background Windows CE Tile Disabled Appearance Default Windows Standard Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Timer 3 seconds External Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Timer 2 minutes Display Properties 2 OK x Display Properties 2 OK x Display Properties ok x Background ES arance Backlight Background Appearance Backlight Background Appearance Backlight B Windowsce Scheme TEEETTEEETSETNM lon Save battery life by automatically turning off the Tile image on background Save ail Delete Apply Y backlight when not needed Turn off backlight when using Normal Disabled em EE Battery power and device is idle for more than mmm E fox x M EAC ee and device is idle Dialog MN Text E minutes y Button Item pst H Background Appearance Backlight Figure 3 21 Display Properties There is very little change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Select an image from the dropdown list or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder to display on the Desktop and then tap the OK box to save the change The change takes effect immediately There is very little change from general desktop PC Appearance options Select a scheme
295. tained in other LXE Control Panels or in LAUNCH EXE For example Keypad Control Panel LaunchApp and RunCmd options LAUNCH EXE All applications to be installed into memory are normally in the form of Windows CE CAB files The CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image and need to be copied to the mobile device using an internal Flash card or from a PC using ActiveSync The CAB files are loaded into the folder System which is the internal Flash drive Then information is added to the Launch reg file on the internal Flash drive to make the CAB file auto launch at startup The CAB file can update the registry Launch REG as desired and cause the unpacked file s to be placed in the appropriate location The registry information needed is under the key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist as follows The main subkey is any text and is a description of the installation executable file Then 3 values are added FileName is the name of the CAB file with the path usually System Installed is a DWORD value of 0 which changes to once auto launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files with path installed by the CAB file Since the CAB file installs into DRAM when memory is lost this file is lost and the CAB file must be reinstalled Three optional fields are also added Order Delay and
296. talled in the wireless host environment and are not interchangeable Software Load The software loaded on the MX8 computer consists of Windows CE 5 0 OS hardware specific OEM Adaptation Layer device drivers Internet Explorer for Windows CE browser and MX8 specific utilities The software supported by the MX8 is summarized below Operating System Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Windows CE 5 0 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messaging graphics keyboard and touchscreen input window management and common controls Network and Device Drivers Bluetooth Option Wavelink Avalanche Option LXE AppLock Option Java Option RFTerm VT220 TN5250 TN3270 Terminal Emulation Option LXE API Routines See Accessories for the LXE SDK Kit part number Note Please contact your LXE representative to get access to CAB files as they are released by LXE MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Installed Software Software Applications The following applications are included ActiveSync Viewer Excel Internet Explorer Viewer Image Media Player Viewer PDF Pocket Inbos Viewer Word Scanner Wedge LXE developed WordPad Note that the Viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them Software Backup Application programs and data that are normally RAM resident are backed u
297. te CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode The wedge provides a one to one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control character sequence of keystrokes If control characters are translated the translation is performed on the barcode data prefix and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode on the Main tab selected In Key Message mode when this option is enabled control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent control key keystroke sequence 13 0x0d is translated to Control M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL SHIFT and m keys on the keypad Additionally when Translate All is disabled any control code which has a keystroke equivalent enter tab escape backspace etc is output as a keystroke Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names When a character name is selected from the drop down box the default text Ignore drop is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control Ignore drop is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored Once the user types any character into the Replacement edit control reselecting the ch
298. tegrated Scanner Programming Guide available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop down box None AIM ID Symbol ID or Custom ID Buttons Scanner Control El ok Ix Main comi Barcode vibration Enable Code ID f Symbology Settings Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers Figure 4 4 Scanner Control Barcode tab Symbology Settings Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a barcode before transmission Ctrl Char Mapping Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in barcodes Custom Identifiers Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a Code ID After a Custom Identifier is defined Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter MXS Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Barcode Tab 149 Enable Code ID This parameter programs the internal scanner to transmit the specified Code ID and or determines the type of barcode identifier being processed If the scanner being configured is not an integrated scanner the scanner d
299. tention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow Also when marked on product means to refer to the manual or user s guide C International fuse replacement symbol When marked on the product the label includes fuse ratings in volts v and amperes a for the product Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information CAUTION Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result A in minor or moderate injury WARNING Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result A in death or serious injury DANGER Keyword that indicates a imminent hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in A death or serious injury MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Components Components Front E EQ MX8RG A 10 E y 4 O oF lt oo O o O O O O Ez 1 y lg j i Figure 1 1 Front of MX8 Imager Scanner Aperture Speaker System Status LED Scan Button Orange Key Sticky Key Blue Key Sticky Key Scan Status LED Cable Port On Off Button Alpha Mode LED O Diamond Number Keys MXS Reference Guide 6 Components al Back Figure 1 2 Back 1 Imager Scanner Aperture Trigger Handle Attach Points 2 and Handstrap Retainer Bracket Attach Points 3 Main Battery 4 Battery Fastener 5 Cable Ports I O Port Note The touch screen stylus is tethered to the handstrap or the trigger handle
300. tery Warning will transition the mobile device to Suspend before the device powers off Backup Battery The MXS has a backup battery that is designed to provide limited duration electrical power in the event of main battery failure The backup battery is a 160 mAh Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH battery that is factory installed in the unit The energy needed to maintain the backup battery near full charge at all times comes from the MX8 main battery It takes several hours of operation before the backup battery is capable of supporting the operation of the mobile device The duration of backup battery life is dependent upon operation of the MX8 its features and any operating applications The backup battery has a minimum service life of two years The backup battery 1s replaced by LXE E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 62 Power Supply al Handling Batteries Safely Never dispose of a battery in a fire This may cause an explosion Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell Be careful when handling any battery If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not attempt to charge it Dispose of it using proper procedures Caution Nickel based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin eyes etc Leakage from cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur In this event rinse the affected area thoroughly with water If the solution contacts the eyes ge
301. tery life is less than 50 there will be a message box popup to warn user The application will wait for user s confirmation before proceeding to update e Incase of update error the application will not reboot the system instead it will show the error message on screen and wait for user s confirmation to proceed e If available always perform MX8 updates when there is a fully charged backup battery and or a dependable external power source connected to the MX8 If the application displays Update OS Image Failed or Update Boot Loader Warning Image Failed do not cold boot the system manually Perform a warm boot then try reflashing again Cold booting will cause an MX8 system crash since there is no valid image in the system Place new image files on a Mini SD card or in the System Folder Launch the MX8Update exe from another application using the following format MX8Update exe F L Use F for Far East Language Image 48M L for Latin Language Image 40M path Specifies the path where the image files are located Example MX8Update path storage remote If the path parameter is not present MX8Update searches in My Device System then Storage Card for the image files auto When this command line option is specified the update is started automatically No user interaction is required The Start button is dimmed fe Repartitions the on board flash to a SOMB partition for the OS image When
302. tery straight up and out Do not slam or drop the battery into the charging well Do not allow foreign material to fall or spill into the charging well Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the main battery pack or the Multi Charger Multi charger LEDs The status of the charge operation is communicated by the LED located at the base of each charging well LED Indication Description Off No Battery power Battery pack not plugged in or no power applied Green Charged Battery pack fully charged Red Charging Battery pack charging Yellow Standby Battery pack temperature out of range Flashing Red on any Fault Battery pack fault or failure station Please refer to the MX8 Multi Charger User s Guide for instruction E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 64 MX8 Cradles Optional MX8 Cradles Optional The MX8 Desktop Cradle restrains the MX8 re charges MX8 main batteries and enables serial or USB communication with a PC scanner printer or other peripheral device MX8 keypad data entries can be mixed with cradle tethered scanner barcode data entries while the MX8 is in a powered cradle Bluetooth device connection and use while the MX8 is docked are managed by the MX8 Control Panel Bluetooth program not the cradle Using wall AC adapters or DC DC converters the desktop cradle can also recharge a spare MX8 battery in approximately 4 hours while the mobile device is d
303. the OK button is tapped When you tap Dd Run and using the virtual keypad or SIP type ClearHive factory default registry settings are loaded All user changes and settings are lost The command is not case sensitive E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 50 Mini SD card Mini SD card Note When removing or inserting a Mini SD card protect the MX8 internal components from electrostatic discharge Make sure the proper software is pre loaded and wireless client cards are properly configured The MXS has one internal Mini SD card port The internal Mini SD card supports FAT file system via a special device driver and appears to the OS as a Storage Card folder This allows the contents to be manipulated via the standard Windows CE interface Figure 2 3 Mini SD card Location Note As there is no card management software loaded on the MX8 LXE recommends purchasing preformatted Mini SD cards from LXE as the cards have been tested and qualified for use by the MX8 see Accessories LXE does not support other types of Flash cards at this time Contact your LXE representative for the latest information about the availability of LXE qualified flash cards for the MX8 Mini SD card Insertion Removal Equipment required None e LXE recommends that installation removal of cards be performed on a clean well lit surface Anti static protection is required when installing removing cards Not supplied by LXE If you anticipate ke
304. the automatic flash update is complete replace the rubber barrier and replace the main battery MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Chapter 4 Scanner Introduction Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters enable or disable symbologies from being scanned scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Scanner parameters apply to the MX8 integrated scanner imager only Barcode manipulation parameters apply to barcodes scanned by the MX8 integrated scanner imager engine Scanner configuration can be changed using the Scanner Control Panel or via the LXE API functions While the changed configuration is being read the Scanner LED is solid amber The scanner is not operational during the configuration update Integrated Scanner Programming Guide and the factory defaults barcodes After scanning the S scanner engine specific barcode to reset all scanner parameters to factory default settings 1 e EL Reset All Set Factory Defaults Default Settings etc the next step is to open the Control Panel Scanner Properties panel Tap the OK button and close the Scanner panel This action will synchronize all scanner formats The MX8 may have a Symbol laser scan engine Start Settings Control Panel About e Symbol SE955 I000WR or one of two Imagers e Intermec EV 15 Imager e Hand Held Prod
305. the external power supplies and vehicle mounting options for the MX8 Chapter 3 System Configuration takes you through the CE 5 0 operating system setup and the MXS file structure Also describes and explains initial ActiveSync processes the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler and MX8 specific utilities Chapter 4 Scanner describes the function layout and setup for the integrated Scanner Imager Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration details 2 4GHz networked client setup Configuration for WEP and WPA is included Chapter 6 AppLock covers all aspects of the LXE AppLock program Appendix A Key Maps describes the key press sequences for the keypad Custom Key mapping instruction is included Appendix B Technical Specifications lists MX8 technical specifications E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 4 Overview al Document Conventions ALL CAPS All caps are used to represent disk directories file names and application names Rather than use the phrase choose the Save command from the File menu this manual Menu Choice A uses the convention choose File Save Quotes Indicates the title of a book chapter or a section within a chapter for example Document Conventions lt gt Indicates a key on the keypad for example lt Enter gt y yp p f ERO Indicates a reference to other documentation ATTENTION Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow At
306. the protective film and the glass display remove the protective film clean the display and apply the protective film again Copy the MX8 LXEbook to the MX8 Optional Note The LXEbook user guides do not contain the illustrations and regulatory information contained in the full user guides on the LXE Manuals CD and on the LXE ServicePass website See the full format User Guide MX8 User s Guide on the LXE Manuals CD Mobile Device Required Adobe Acrobat Reader Version MX8 Windows CE PDF Viewer pre installed First using your desktop computer download LXEbook MX8 Users Guide from the LXE Manuals CD to your desktop computer Next refer to ActiveSync Processes and Initial Install in Chapter 3 of this guide before connecting the MX8 to your PC When the MX8 and the desktop ActiveSync applications are synchronized tap Explore on the ActiveSync menu on your PC to display the contents of the MX8 folders Then open the folder on your desktop computer containing the downloaded LXEbook Tap and drag the LXEbook to the My Documents folder on the MX8 When the file copy process is finished disconnect the MX8 from the synchronization equipment and close ActiveSync To view the LXEbook on the MX8 select Start Programs Microsoft File Viewers Microsoft PDF Viewer File Open Locate the LXEbook on the MX8 and open the file See Also Install LXEbooks on the LXE Manuals CD E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference
307. tion about e Enable stylesheets Enable page transitions n 9 Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Sites Settings Internet Options lok FE Privacy Advanced Popups Li Popup Windows Block popups Exceptions Advanced Accept Block Prompt 8 Prompt M Always alow session cookies Disable automatic SIP Mey E Underline links r Open new pages in the ie Never Z window Figure 3 23 Internet Options Select a tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Changes are saved from tab to tab Tap the X box to ignore all changes The changes take effect immediately Tap the 2 button for Help Factory Default Settings General Start Page http www lxe com Search Page http www google com Cache Size 512 Kb Connection Use LAN Disabled Autodial Name Blank Proxy Server Disabled Bypass Proxy Disabled Security Allow cookies Enabled Allow TLS 1 0 security Enabled Allow SSL 2 0 security Enabled Allow SSL 3 0 security Enabled Warn when switching Enabled E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 98 Settings Control Panel Options al MXS Reference Guide Factory Default Settings Privacy First pa
308. to a host and to create the initial partnership for synchronizing over the radio The default connect setup is USB direct connect After a Connect setup is selected a Programs Communication Connect will start to connect to a host See Also Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection Start Stop FTP Server Access A Programs Communication Start FTP Server or Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Start Menu Program Options Summit Client Access AY Programs Summit 5 ga Summit automatically installs and runs after every cold and warm boot Start Programs Summit scu See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for Summit Client Utility setup information and instruction Certs Access AY Programs Summit Certs Contents of README TXT file located in Start Programs Summit Certs menu option This directory is the default directory for digital certificates and protected access credentials PACs used in conjunction with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP types When you use PEAP or EAP TLS you must provision a certificate authority CA certificate for the EAP authentication server and distribute that certificate to every client device On the device you can store the certificate in the Microsoft certific
309. tooth hardware and software is installed e The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner laser imager battery is fully charged e The MXS batteries are fully charged Alternatively the MX8 may be cabled to AC DC power e The barcode numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created nor scanned with a Bluetooth scanner e To open the LXEZ Pairing program tap Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon on the desktop or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar TET Il ll Figure 1 26 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label Locate the barcode label similar to the one shown above attached to the mobile device The label is the Bluetooth address identifier for the MX8 The mobile Bluetooth scanner imager requires this information before discovering pairing connecting or disconnecting can occur Important The MX8 Bluetooth address identifier label should remain protected from damage rips tears spills soiling erasure etc at all times It may be required when pairing connecting and disconnecting new Bluetooth barcode readers E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 34 Bluetooth d MX8 with Label If the MX8 has a Bluetooth address barcode label attached follow these steps 1 Scan the Bluetooth address barcode label attached to the MX8 with the LXE Bluetooth mobile scanner 2 If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the MX8 Blue
310. tooth label the devices are paired See section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Ifthe devices do not pair successfully go to the next step Open the LXEZ Pairing panel Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Tap Discover Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel Doubletap the Bluetooth scanner until the right mouse click menu appears Select Pair as Scanner to pair the MX8 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner XA d The devices are paired The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Refer to the following section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Note After scanning the MX8 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired MX8 without Label If the MX8 Bluetooth address barcode label does not exist follow these steps to create a unique Bluetooth address barcode for the MX8 First locate the MX8 Bluetooth address by tapping Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth About tab Bluetooth Address 00 40 FD 03 70 97 Figure 1 27 About tab and Bluetooth Address Next create a Bluetooth address barcode label for the MX8 The format for the barcode label is as follows e Barcode type must be Code 128 e FNC3 character followed by string Uppercase L lowercase n lowercase k uppercase B and then the Bluetooth address 12 hex digits no colons For example LakB0400fd002031
311. tor Control panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again Ifthe passwords match the password is encrypted and saved See Also Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi Application AppLock MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Multi Application Configuration 219 Status Panel View Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile specified by the Administrator For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information Administrator Control ok Security Status Filename iSystemiapplock txt u Refresh og Level None l Save As ear Status Figure 6 6 Status Panel Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog tap OK The default is None Error Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the admi
312. ttery completely depletes or external power is applied to the MX8 using an AC Adapter You can replace the main battery by first placing the device in Suspend Mode then removing the discharged main battery and installing a charged main battery within a five minute time limit or before the backup battery depletes When the main battery is removed the device enters Critical Suspend state the MX8 remains in Suspend mode the display is turned off and the backup battery continues to power the unit for at least five minutes Though data is retained the MX8 cannot be used until a charged main battery pack is installed After installing the new battery press the Power key Full operational recovery from Suspend can take several seconds while the radio if installed is reestablishing a wireless client link If the backup battery depletes before a fully charged main battery can be inserted the MX8 will turn Off Low Battery Warning It is recommended that the main battery pack be removed and replaced when its energy depletes When the main battery Low Battery Warning appears the Status LED remains a steady red perform an orderly shut down minimizing the operation of any installed devices and insuring any information is saved that should be saved Note Once you receive the main battery Low Battery Warning you have approximately 5 minutes to perform an orderly shutdown and replace the main battery pack before the device powers off The Low Bat
313. two Bluetooth devices can be connected to the MX8 at a time LXE supports one scanner and one printer see Accessories Taskbar Icon Legend o Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s MXS is not connected to any Bluetooth device A MX8 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device MXS is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive Note Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and auto reconnect events AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using the Bluetooth application nor does it stop other Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the MX8 while AppLock is in control See Chapter 6 AppLock for more information MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 91 al Certificates Access A Settings Control Panel Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Lists the certificates trusted by you Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Figure 3 17 System Stored Certificates Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the MX8 user These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client access point or the host system Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a h
314. u which contains navigation functions like Back Forward Home Refresh etc functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users When the Menu checkbox is blank the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable When the Status checkbox is enabled the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end user when they are navigating the Internet If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet checkbox E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 218 Multi Application Configuration Security Panel Administrator Control E LOK application Sewty lt Hot Key Srife Ctrl a Password ___ Confirm Password Figure 6 5 Security Panel Setting an Activation Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be
315. ucts 5380SF 2D Imager The integrated scan engine activates when the Scan button on the front of the MX8 is depressed or when the trigger on an installed trigger handle is depressed Please refer to the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide for ba A instruction on configuring specific scanner imager parameters by using the MX8 to scan engine specific setup barcodes in the guide E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 144 Barcode Processing Overview m Barcode Processing Overview Note Steps l 7 describe the barcode manipulation Steps 8 12 describe how the manipulated data is built Step 13 describes how the manipulated data is output The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows 1 Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID If one is found it is stripped from the data and the settings for the symbology specified are used Otherwise the All symbology settings are used 2 Ifsymbology is disabled the scan is rejected 3 Ifthe length of data minus the code ID is out of specified Min Max range the scan is rejected 4 Strip leading data bytes unconditionally 5 Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally 6 Parse for and strip if found Barcode Data strings 7 Replace any control characters with string as configured 8 Add prefix string to output buffer 9 If Code ID is not stripped add saved code ID from above to output buffer 10 Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer 11 Add suffix stri
316. udio signal from the device flashing LED on the device or a dialog box is placed on the MX8 display 10 Whenever the MX8 returns from Suspend Mode all previously paired live Bluetooth devices in the vicinity are paired one at a time with the MX8 If the devices cannot connect to the MXS before the re connect timeout time period expires default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired device there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to Reconnect is disabled U SADO CA cR See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 32 Bluetooth Bluetooth Devices Assumption The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for each MX8 The System Administrator has also enabled disabled Bluetooth settings and assigned a Computer Friendly Name for each MX8 See Chapter 3 System Configuration Bluetooth control panel applet and supported Bluetooth printers and scanners The Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth LED states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered pair connect and disconnect There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the MX8 Taskbar Icon Legend 6 Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s MXS is not connected to any Bluetooth device x MXS is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device MXS is out of ra
317. uetooth devices is complete This option 1s disabled by default Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report failure to reconnect If the reconnect timeout default is 30 minutes expires a dialog box appears on the MX8 display notifying the end user the connection between one or all of the previously paired Bluetooth devices has failed This option is enabled by default Click the OK button to remove the dialog box from the screen Computer is connectable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox Enable this checkbox when you want the MX8 to be able to pair with other Bluetooth devices This option is enabled by default Computer is discoverable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox Enable this checkbox when you want the MX8 to be Discovered by other Bluetooth devices This option is disabled by default Prompt if devices request to pair A dialog box appears on the MX8 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests to pair with the MX This option is disabled by default The requesting Bluetooth device does not need to have been Discovered by the MX8 before the pairing request is received Click the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen Continuous Search This option is disabled by default When enabled the Bluetooth connection never stops searching for a device it has paired with if the connection is broken such as the pair
318. ulation MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A The Keypad The Keypad The keypad is installed and configured by LXE to your specifications 8 z x o TD 00 0 0 010 6 0 System Status LED Scan Button Enter Button ane On Off Button ER Scan Status LED GHI mu MNO Speaker gt 0 OO 1 2 Alpha Status LED Diamond Keys Orange Key Sticky O Blue Key Sticky 2 O ON Oo Ah YN 0 08 000 Q ION Figure 2 6 The 32 Key Keypad e When using a sequence of keys that require an alpha key first press the Alph key Use the Shft sticky key or the Caps key sequence Blue Tab for upper case alphabetic characters e Pressing the Alph key forces Alpha mode for the 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 keys The 1 and 0 keys continue to place a 1 and 0 into the text field e To create a combination of numbers and letters before pressing Enter remember to tap the Alph key to toggle between Alpha and Numeric mode e When using a sequence of keys that do not include the Alph key but does include a sticky key press the sticky key first then the rest of the key sequence The keymaps keypress sequences are located in Appendix A Key Maps E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 54 The Keypad Mappable Diamond Keys The Diamond keys can be programmed to perform specific functions For example using this Settings applet you could set the Diamond key to function as an ESC key enabling you to use one k
319. unciis etitm etin ier digesta 119 AppLock Password sss 211 CODO Ot nete ptor rie eter 124 Password screensaver 105 turbo mode switching sese 43 U Uninstall a program sse 108 E EQ MX8RG A Index Update monitoring sse 126 USB Client and Power port sss 46 User access power up password 105 User Certificate on the MXS sssssssses 203 User Certificates Generating terti te reed enatis 198 User certificates and private keys sss 27 User specific application version information 80 81 Utilities 00 0 ol0 0 eee irio 124 Laude tion 121 ATA snini esaeet 124 Regload sess 125 V Version control coocooconcnincnocnnocnconcoononononononnnonnonnnnnos 67 Version window information 80 81 Vibration Good scan and bad scan 146 Vibration tab Nem TR 163 Video Subsystem oooooonocococonononononononnnnononononnnconccn noo 44 View Display niet tes 59 Virtual keyboard Input panel cinere ris 36 Virtual Keyboard eee 96 VK Code List esi tene ente 257 Voice ACCeSSOFIES iiis iecit enin 39 Voice dat iii es 38 Volume adjust audio volume ssssssssss 24 using the keypad sss arrese 24 E EQ MX8RG A 267 Volume and Sounds default values 112 Volume control ooonnooccnon
320. unction is performed Admin Password Entry x Enter Admin Password Figure 5 3 Main Tab Enter Admin Password Enter the Admin password the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive and tap OK If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed The Administrator default password can be changed on the Global tab The end user can Turn the radio on or off on the Main tab Select an active Profile on the Main tab View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab View the global parameter settings on the Global tab View the current connection details on the Status tab View radio status software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab After Admin login the end user can also e Create edit rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab e Edit global parameters on the Global tabs e Enable disable the Summit tray icon in the taskbar E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 170 Summit Client Configuration sd Profile Tab Note Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Factory Default Settings Profile Default SSID Blank Client Name Blank Power Save Fast Tx Power Maximum Bit Rate Auto Radio Mode BG Rates Full Auth Type Open EA
321. up Data Files sss 117 Cables iia 116 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection 119 Connect cables inei tede 118 Connection serial or USB 115 Disconnect how to 119 A eren teeth ee 118 Help ic cn n nere rine 114 Initial installation sse 115 rti rud Ten Lo vo E EC 114 IR port transmission 72 partnership prerequisite eese 117 Set p Wizard cech ess 114 115 Troubleshooting seen 119 ActiveSync Help e e s 72 Adapters Avalanche eee aeneis 137 Admin Hotkey Apploock ees 213 Administration ADpLOCk aiii 82 Administrator Summit client utility esses 169 Align touchscreen coccoocccocconoconcnoncconconnonn nono nonnnonnronnnnnnnnos 22 Allow Close 217 Allow PC Connection sse 106 Alpha Mode LED sse 55 Alt key function ooooocooccconooccnononononnnonnnnonononcnnnconncnnnos 56 APLcallS 2 nata a 140 API Routines esses enne 66 Appearance options oooooooonoccconcononnnonnnnononnncnnnnnnnnnnoos 95 Application Panel sse 213 AppLock EU diner nte 217 E EQ MX8RG A Index P sSWotds 4 e ee tee are tes 211 NI o MAASE EEEE A EE ES 207 AppLock Administrator eese 68 ASCII Control Codes in hex suss 258 ASAS one cite e eec adea 99 Assemble Audio connection
322. ur custom IDs using 1 for EAN128 barcode and 0 for Code128 barcode e cl Code CI e c2 Code Cl e c3 Code C0 24 character barcode is CODE128 e c4 Code C1 Custom IDs Name Add AIM Custom IDs E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 162 Barcode Tab AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner e cl min length 34 max length 34 strip leading 2 strip trailing 18 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c2 min length 26 max length 26 strip leading 2 strip trailing 10 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c3 min length 24 max length 24 strip leading 2 strip trailing 8 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c4 min length 20 max length 20 strip leading 0 strip trailing 4 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 00 Add the AIM custom symbologies Refer to the previous section Barcode Symbology Settings for instruction symbology mmm 1 V Enable Min pe Max 4 Strip V Leading E Code ID Y Traling is Barcode Data Add _ Prefix _ ee _ Suffix AIM Custom Setup for C1 Click the Barcode Data button Click the Add button Add the data for the match codes sl Ls jen Barcode Match Data for C1 Refer to the previous section BarcodeData Match List for instruction Scan a barcode and examine the result MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Vibration Tab Vibration Tab 163 y Acc
323. us on the center of the target as it moves around the screen Press Enter to keep the new calibration settings or Esc to cancel MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Settings Control Panel Options 111 al System Access A Settings Control Panel System Icon Review System and mobile device data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Factory Default Settings General N A Memory 1 3 storage 2 3 program memory Device Name MX8001 Device Description LXE MX8 General Memory Device Name lt gt General Memory Device Name System Move slider to the left for more Microsoft Windows CE memory to run programs Move it to Version 5 00 the right for more storage space Copyright 2004 Microsoft Corp All Only unused RAM black portion of rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright law Computer Processor intel ARM920T PX memory memory Memory 95112 KB RAM 28256KB total 56856KB total E 2672KB in use 9704KB in use Expansion cards Summitoc 802 y Registered to General Memory Your device uses this information to identify itself to other computers imponents you are running Device name without spaces your product may contain the MXS001 following third party technologies p
324. used in this guide are located in the file titled LXE Technical Glossary on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website Manuals MX8 User s Guide English MXS User s Guide German MXS Cradle Reference Guide MX8 Multi Charger User s Guide LXEbook MX8 User s Guide download to mobile device RFTerm Reference Guide LXE Security Primer CE API Programmers Guide Integrated Scanner Programmers Guide Accessories Note Items with a Green letter R in the second column are ROHS compliant Please contact your LXE representative when ordering ROHS compliant items as the part number may have changed Items without the letter R may have received ROHS compliance after this guide was published MX8 Main Battery Lithium Ion R MX8A380BATT MXS and MX Desktop cradle power supply with US power cord R MX8A30ICRDLPSACUS MXS and MX Desktop cradle power supply without power cord R MX8A302CRDLPSACWW MXS Passive vehicle cradle Does not support charging or R MX8A003VMCRADLE communication U Bracket included MXS Desktop cradle requires power supply R MX8A002DESKCRADLE Sp api dia d MESA e Bracket This kit does NOT include R MX8A00IRAMBRKT MXS 4 Unit Main Battery Multi Charger US power cord R MX8A385CHGR4US MXS 4 Unit Main Battery Multi Charger no power cord R MX8A386CHGRAWW Carry case for MX8 with no handle includes shoulder strap R MX8A410CASENOH
325. ust Microphone and Secure the Cable Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth Note the small Talk label near the mouthpiece Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing Under Clothing e Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar e Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head Over Clothing e Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body e Tuck the cable under the belt but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt e Do not wear the cable on the front of your body It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 20 Power Key pr Power Key Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the MX8 Power Key Figure 1 19 Power Key Location The Power key is located at the bottom of the keypad When a battery is inserted in the MX8 for the first time press the Power key to turn the device On Tapping the Power key places the MX8 immediately in Suspend mode Tapping the Power key again releases the MX8 from Suspend Mode Or Tap a Suspend E My Device LXEZ Pairing Summit Client Utility ar e Recycle Bin M
326. vailable on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a barcode The Symbology drop down box contains all symbologies supported on the MX8 An asterisk appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value Each time a Symbology is changed the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop down list Symbology fan y Enable Min ji Max far Leading p Code ID Trailing a Barcode Data Add Prefix i suffix Suffix Figure 4 5 Barcode Tab Symbology Settings Clear This button will erase any programmed overrides returning to the default settings for the selected symbology If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology a confirmation dialog appears then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults and all star indications are removed from the list of Symbologies The order in which these settings are processed are Min Max Code ID Leading Trailing Barcode Data Prefix and Suffix Note When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in t
327. vice Setup a New Device Prerequisites e The touch panel must be enabled Refer to the Start Settings Control Panel Handheld Misc Touch Panel Disabled setting e An MXS default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is assigned LXE CE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies applications to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode Briefly the process to configure a new device is as follows 1 Inserta fully charged battery and press the Power button See Chapter 1 Introduction for instruction 2 Connect an external power source to the device if required See Chapter 1 Introduction for instruction 3 Adjust screen display audio volume and other parameters if desired Install accessories e g handstrap stylus See Chapter 1 Introduction for instruction 4 Tap Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon Assign a Switch Key hotkey sequence for AppLock See Security Panel Assign an application on the Application tab screen More than one application can be assigned See Application Panel Assign a password on the Security tab screen See Security Panel Select a view level on the
328. vice is the system administrator LXE s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up When the mobile device is reset to factory default values for example after a cold boot the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application see Auto Re Launch which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available Contact your LXE representative for assistance downloads and update availability E EQ MX8RG A MXS Reference Guide 208 Setup a New De
329. with the RS 232 serial port External AC power is available when the Adapter RS 232 terminal port to D9 male cable is connected USB Client Port The MXS has one USB Client port for ActiveSync applications An accessory USB cable Cable Multipurpose USB and Power is available to connect the MX8 to a USB Type A plug on a PC for ActiveSync functions External AC power is available when the multipurpose USB Client Power cable is connected Audio Headset Connection An audio headset interface is available using the Adapter Audio accessory with the I O port The connection cable connects the MX8 to a Voxware quick disconnect 4 pin interface This cable adapts to specific styles of headsets for voice input stereo or mono output The MX8 with a Summit Client supports mono only A 3 wire connector with at a minimum connections for ground microphone and 1 speaker Connecting the headset to the MX8 COM port turns off audio output to the MX8 speaker on the front of the mobile device All sounds previously directed to the speaker are redirected to the headphone including beeps Bias voltage for an electric condenser microphone is available External AC power is available for this option Power is drawn from the main battery pack MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Hardware Configuration 47 al Audio Support Speaker The speaker supplies audible verification signals normally used by the Window s CE operating system The spe
330. x j paw Page Down o x d Down Arrow F1 P l F1 F2 EIE F2 FS EE AAA A F3 F4 P F4 F5 ppp ee FS F6 L x P F1 F7 AA RAE A F2 F8 x P F3 F9 E Ez e p F4 F10 x P F5 F11 x P j F1 F12 Px P j F2 F13 px P S F3 F14 Px P S F4 F15 pere E HA AE A F5 F16 L pop xp F1 F17 Lo p p IC F2 F18 BE ASAS U F3 F19 L T P x F4 F20 PO POSO T T IC E F5 F21 x x F1 MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad 233 al To Get This MX8 Key Press These Keys and Then Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha F22 Lo x xp F2 F23 Odds xp F3 F24 L ox f xl FA a Lo o pop op px 2 b EE GENE MERE a 22 c E ue up pen 222 d Lo Lo LL px 3 e Po pop Pp ox 33 f Lo Lo LL px 333 g a a a a ee T 4 h Po pop op ox 44 Lo pop op px 444 LL Ld s k pop dox 55 LE qd Yd d TL ous 555 m Lo pop op px 6 n Po pop Pp ox 66 o Lo pop op px 666 p Lo Lo LL px 7 q EM HEN CN RD PE 77 r Ede e rie 777 s Lo o o LL Lo x Ll 7 t Oo ETT la 8 u Oo S p T dece d 88 v Oo pop S ox 888 w pop dox 9 x EE TE AA 99 z lp ox ee A Po pop xx 2 B Po pop xp xx 22 C L S T xp xx 222 D Po pop xp xx 3 E Lo pop xx 33 F AE AE ERA 333 G EA a 4 H pur AA 44 Lo pop xp x 444 J NE MEN 5 K LL 55 L 555 M x x 6 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 234
331. y Desuments LXE RFTerm If Programs dows C Se Favorites gt Documents gt G settings HEBE ra S Help de CJ Run Remote ssp A Desktop RP Suspend Figure 1 20 Suspend Mode See Also LED Indicators and System Status LED later in this guide See Also Reboot Sequence for reboot options and instruction MX8 Reference Guide E EQ MX8RG A Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus 21 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touchscreen Never use an actual pen pencil sharp or abrasive object to write on the touchscreen Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen Place the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use Like using a mouse to left click icons on a desktop computer screen using the stylus to tap icons on the touchscreen is the basic action that can Open applications Choose menu commands Select options in dialog boxes or drop down boxes Drag the slider in a scroll bar Select text by dragging the stylus across the text Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data or retrieving data using the Scan button or an input output device connected to the serial port e A mouse right click is performed by holding the stylus down on the touchscreen A circle of dots appear and then the right
332. zb d 121 Clea Hive HP dc 124 GrabTime EXE 124 Synchronize with a local time serve visos nci ete E eere t Er HEREDES ie LAE ETE EHE 124 Rep Edon EXE siressa 124 O E 124 ROG Load EXE rra area 125 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration eese nennen nnns 125 A erm Tom ela T ER KAM awe eU etm M Fe PRA MEE redu te aed 125 Enabler Install Prode ute icit iaa aaa Bases ERS ted OPE rn cia 125 Enabler Uninstall Process ta 125 SIOp tlie Enabler SENICE i es deae reru A ts DDR E IE kaneis 126 Update Montoro Overview ia te ene tet eio dt e D v PO Re neret es e fees bee pte ib n dio ice bin tura 126 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Seti gs cio termin tabu ure rra eben nacen ve ae eb te ERR RAS eva sen Ede aa he 127 Enabler Gonti curaio ienr eco lisesi Ardann ie 128 File Mena OpUO0S card 128 E EQ MX8RG A MX8 Reference Guide 8 Table of Contents Avalanche Update using File Seting S 2 21 cei iei t emi i m etd a E eH i e ied adita 130 Meng DEOS a teni HE e RH EROR E ERR ERI Eas te epi HEN NO UE pie reis i te te o in 130 Conneccion A esci ce ai eei M UD ap M E LEE 131 A ence pa ELE ct LUI eet I Les DESC IH 132 Server Contact Tubs tornei cue ELI ccu Le tT pL 133 Startup Shutdown TA mi cese ista inre ren Sa Er S OR HEURE oA EA EA Era DA Qu O ER EUR GR Riiie E 134 fers LEH GEG OL e 21 jae S cus RR uU E EEUU EE IE 135
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
grille-pain rapide vct-250 Peptide Synthesizer USER MANUAL Guide du tri sélectif - La Communauté de Communes du Pays de Electrolux EFC 630 User's Manual Manuale RAS/DY Invacare Aero-tech Uno User Manual Operating Thomson SB220B Pelco c3401m-a User's Manual 3062557 WRS-K Klima- und Lüftungsmodule Stimulateur cardiaque implantable Nanostim Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file